As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 23, 2024
1933 Act Registration No. 333-172328
1940 Act Registration No. 811-08517
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM N-4
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
POST-EFFECTIVE AMENDMENT NO. 47
and
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
AMENDMENT NO. 1123
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N
(Exact Name of Registrant)
Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM
THE LINCOLN NATIONAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Name of Depositor)
1301 South Harrison Street
Post Office Box 1110
Fort Wayne, Indiana 46801
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices)
Depositor’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code: (260) 455-2000
Craig T. Beazer, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
150 North Radnor Chester Road
Radnor, PA 19087
(Name and Address of Agent for Service)
Copy to:
Carolyn E. Augur, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
350 Church Street
Hartford, Connecticut 06103
Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous
It is proposed that this filing will become effective:
/ / immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
/X/ on May 1, 2024, pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
/ / 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
/ / on __________, pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
Title of Securities being registered:
Interests in a separate account under individual flexible payment deferred variable annuity contracts.
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N
Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024
This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) outlines the rider charges and the Protected Annual Income rates for the Lincoln Wealth PassSM rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.
The rates below apply for applications and/or rider election forms signed on and after May 1, 2020 and may be superseded at any time.
The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rates will be disclosed on a new rate sheet at least 10 days in advance of the change. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.
Current Initial Charge Rate 
Age at Issue 0 – 65
 
1.00%
Age at Issue 66 – 80
 
1.25%
Protected Annual Income Rate
The Protected Annual Income (“PAI”) rate will be based on the Contractowner’s age on the earlier of the latest date to begin withdrawals to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy (i.e., death of the original account owner or Contractowner), or the date that the Contract Value reduces to zero. Thereafter, the rate will not change. 
Age
PAI Rate
0 – 54
4.50%
55 – 58
5.00%
59 – 69
5.50%
70+
6.00%
In order to receive the rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed on and after May 1, 2020. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time. The rates set forth above may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion.
Subject to the rules above, if the Protected Annual Income rates that we are currently offering on the day the contract and/or rider is issued are higher than the rates we were offering on the date you signed your application or rider election form, you will receive the higher set of rates. If any rates have decreased when we compare the Protected Annual Income rates that we are offering on the day you signed your application or rider election form to the set of rates that we are offering on the day your contract and/ or rider is issued, your contract / rider will be issued with the set of rates that were in effect on the day you signed your application or rider election form, subject to meeting the rules above.
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N
Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024
This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rate and percentages that we are currently offering. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.
The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2020.
The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit 
Single Life GIB Percentage
Joint Life GIB Percentage
Age
GIB Percentage
Age
GIB Percentage
Under 40
2.50%
Under 40
2.50%
40-54
3.00%
40-54
3.00%
55-58
3.50%
55-58
3.50%
59-64
4.00%
59-69
4.00%
65-69
4.50%
70-74
4.50%
70-79
5.00%
75-79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
80+
5.50%
 
In order to receive the rate indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed and dated on and after May 1, 2020. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.
*Purchasers of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage (regardless of the rider effective date) may use any remaining Guaranteed Amount (if greater than the Account Value) to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM Individual Variable Annuity Contracts
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N 
May 1, 2024
Home Office:
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
1301 South Harrison Street
Fort Wayne, IN 46802
www.LincolnFinancial.com
1-877-534-8255
This prospectus describes an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company). This Contract can be purchased as either a nonqualified annuity or qualified retirement annuity under Sections 408 (IRAs) and 408A (Roth IRAs) of the tax code. Generally, you do not pay federal income tax on the Contract's growth until it is paid out. You receive tax deferral for an IRA whether or not the funds are invested in an annuity contract. Further, if your Contract is a Roth IRA, you generally will not pay income tax on a distribution, provided certain conditions are met. Therefore, there should be reasons other than tax deferral for purchasing a qualified annuity contract.
This Contract is available through third-party financial intermediaries who charge an advisory fee for their services. That fee is in addition to contract fees and expenses. If you elect to pay third-party advisory fees out of your Contract Value, this deduction may reduce the Death Benefit(s) and other guaranteed benefits, and may be subject to federal and state income taxes and a 10% federal penalty tax. For more details, see Advisory Fee Withdrawals.
The Contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide income over a certain period of time, or for life, subject to certain conditions. The benefits offered under this Contract may be a variable or fixed amount, if available, or a combination of both. This Contract also offers a Death Benefit payable upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant. Certain benefits described in this prospectus are no longer available.
The state in which your Contract is issued will govern whether or not certain features, riders, restrictions, limitations, charges and fees will apply to your Contract. All material state variations are discussed in this prospectus, however, non-material variations may not be discussed. You should refer to your Contract regarding state-specific features. Please contact the Home Office or your financial professional regarding availability.
The minimum initial Purchase Payment for the Contract is $10,000. Additional Purchase Payments, subject to certain restrictions, may be made to the Contract and must be at least $100 per payment ($25 if transmitted electronically), and at least $300 annually. We reserve the right to limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract upon advance written notice.
Except as noted below, you choose whether your Contract Value accumulates on a variable or a fixed (guaranteed) basis or both. Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. If any portion of your Contract Value is in the fixed account, we promise to pay you your principal and a minimum interest rate. We may impose restrictions on the fixed account for the life of your Contract or during certain periods. Also, an Interest Adjustment may be applied to any withdrawal, surrender, or transfer from the fixed account before the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.
You should carefully consider whether or not this Contract is the best product for you.
All Purchase Payments for benefits on a variable basis will be placed in Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N (Variable Annuity Account [VAA]). You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Contract’s variable options (“Subaccounts”), which, in turn, invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, it goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. We do not guarantee how any of the Subaccounts or their funds will perform. Also, neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract. The contracts are not bank deposits and are not endorsed by any bank or government agency.
All prospectuses and other shareholder reports, will be made available on www.lfg.com/VAprospectus.
The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available online at Investor.gov.
1
Table of Contents 
Item
Page
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
18
19
22
23
26
30
31
35
42
43
46
47
53
53
53
53
54
54
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
2
Special Terms
In this prospectus, the following terms have the indicated meanings:
5% Enhancement—A feature under certain Living Benefit Riders in which the Income Base, minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5%, subject to certain conditions.
Access Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, a defined period of time during which we make Regular Income Payments to you while you still have access to your Account Value. This means that you may make withdrawals, surrender the Contract, and have a Death Benefit.
Account or Variable Annuity Account (VAA)—The segregated investment account, Account N, into which we set aside and invest the assets for the variable side of the contract offered in this prospectus.
Account Value—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date that i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments and withdrawals.
Account Value Step-up—(may be referred to as Account Value lock-in in marketing materials)—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the Protected Income Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary, subject to certain conditions.
Accumulation Unit—A measure used to calculate Contract Value for the variable side of the contract before the Annuity Commencement Date and to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value during the Access Period.
Advisory Fee Withdrawal—Withdrawals from your Contract Value to pay the advisory fees associated with your Fee-Based Financial Plan.
Annuitant—The person upon whose life the annuity benefit payments are based, and upon whose death a Death Benefit may be paid.
Annuity Commencement Date—The Valuation Date when funds are withdrawn or converted into Annuity Units or fixed dollar payout for payment of retirement income benefits under the Annuity Payout option you select(other than i4LIFE® Advantage).
Annuity Payout—A regularly scheduled payment (under any of the available annuity options) that occurs after the Annuity Commencement Date (or Periodic Income Commencement Date if i4LIFE® Advantage has been elected). Payments may be variable or fixed, or a combination of both.
Annuity Unit—A measure used to calculate the amount of Annuity Payouts for the variable side of the contract after the Annuity Commencement Date.
Beneficiary—The person you choose to receive any Death Benefit paid if you die before the Annuity Commencement Date.
Benefit Year—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. Under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, if the Contractowner elects a step-up, the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the step-up after that.
Contract—The variable annuity contract you have entered into with Lincoln Life.
Contractowner (you, your, owner)—The person who can exercise the rights within the Contract (decides on investment allocations, transfers, payout option, designates the Beneficiary, etc.). Usually, but not always, the Contractowner is the Annuitant.
Contract Value (may be referred to as Account Value in marketing materials)—At any given time before the Annuity Commencement Date, the total value of all Accumulation Units of a Contract, plus the value of the fixed side of the contract, if any.
Contract Year—Each 12-month period starting with the effective date of the Contract and starting with each contract anniversary after that.
Death Benefit—Before the Annuity Commencement Date, the amount payable to your designated Beneficiary if the Contractowner dies. As an alternative, the Contractowner may receive a Death Benefit on the death of the Annuitant prior to the Annuity Commencement Date.
Enhancement Period—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the 10-year period during which a 5% Enhancement is in effect. Additional Enhancement Periods may be available, subject to certain conditions.
Excess Withdrawals—Amounts withdrawn during a Benefit Year, as specified for each Living Benefit Rider, which decrease or eliminate the guarantees under the rider.
Good Order—The actual receipt at our Home Office of the requested transaction in writing or by other means we accept, along with all information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. The forms we provide will identify the necessary documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in Good Order, and we reserve the right to change or waive any Good Order requirements at any time.
3
Guaranteed Amount—The value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.
Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option—A fixed Annuity Payout option available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage under which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for life.
Guaranteed Period—The period during which Contract Value in a fixed account will be credited a guaranteed interest rate.
i4LIFE® Advantage Credit—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the additional amount credited to the Contract if both the minimum Access Period requirement and threshold value are met.
Interest Adjustment—An upward or downward adjustment on the amount of Contract Value in the fixed account upon a transfer, withdrawal or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account due to fluctuations in interest rates.
Investment Requirements—Restrictions in how you may allocate your Subaccount investments if you own certain Living Benefit Riders.
Lifetime Income Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the period of time following the Access Period during which we make Regular Income Payments to you for the rest of your life (and Secondary Life, if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer have access to your Account Value or receive a Death Benefit.
Lincoln Life (we, us, our, Company)—The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company.
Living Benefit Rider—A general reference to optional riders that provide some type of a minimum income guarantee while you are alive. If you select a Living Benefit Rider, Excess Withdrawals may have adverse effects on the benefit, and you may be subject to Investment Requirements.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.
Nursing Home Enhancement—A feature that will increase the Protected Annual Income amount under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 upon admittance to an approved nursing care facility, subject to certain conditions.
Periodic Income Commencement Date—The Valuation Date on which the amount of i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments are determined.
Protected Amount—The value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income under the Lincoln Wealth PassSM rider, as adjusted by additional Purchase Payments and all withdrawals.
Protected Annual Income—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income or Maximum Annual Withdrawal in your Contract)—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal amount available from the Contract each Benefit Year for life under certain Living Benefit Riders.
Protected Annual Income Payout Option—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option or Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option in your Contract)—A payout option available under certain Living Benefit Riders in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life.
Protected Income Base—(may be referred to as Income Base or Guaranteed Amount in your Contract)—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount or the minimum payouts under your Contract at a later date.
Purchase Payments—Amounts paid into the Contract.
Rate Sheet—A prospectus supplement, that will be filed periodically, where we declare the current Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages under i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Regular Income Payments—The variable, periodic income payments paid under i4LIFE® Advantage.
Secondary Life—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the person designated by the Contractowner upon whose life the annuity payments will also be contingent.
Subaccount—Each portion of the VAA that reflects investments in Accumulation and Annuity Units of a class of a particular fund available under the contracts. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of a fund.
Valuation Date—Each day the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) is open for trading.
Valuation Period—The period starting at the close of trading (normally 4:00 p.m. New York time) on each day that the NYSE is open for trading (Valuation Date) and ending at the close of such trading on the next Valuation Date.
4
Important Information You Should Consider About the Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM Variable Annuity Contract 
 
FEES AND EXPENSES
Location in
Prospectus
Charges for Early
Withdrawals
There are no surrender charges associated with the Contract.
•N/A
Transaction
Charges
There are no sales charges associated with the Contract.
•N/A
Ongoing Fees and
Expenses (annual
charges)
Minimum and Maximum Annual Fee Table. The table below describes the fees and
expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. Please
refer to your contract specifications page for information about the specific fees you will
pay each year based on the options you have elected. These charges do not reflect any
advisory fees paid to a financial intermediary from Contract Value or other assets of the
Contractowner. If such charges were reflected, the ongoing fees and expense would be
higher.
•Fee Tables
•Examples
•Charges and
Other
Deductions
 
Annual Fee
Minimum
Maximum
 
 
Base Contract - Account Value Death
Benefit
0.62%1
0.62%1
 
 
Base Contract – Guarantee of Principal
Death Benefit Base Contract – Guarantee
of Principal Death Benefit
0.67%1
0.67%1
 
 
Base Contract – Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death Benefit
0.92%1
0.92%1
 
 
Base Contract – Estate Enhancement
Benefit
1.12%1
1.12%1
 
 
Investment options (fund fees and
expenses)
0.23%1
3.73%1
 
 
Optional benefits available for an
additional charge (for a single optional
benefit, if elected)
0.40%1
2.45%2
 
 
1 As a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts.
 
 
2 As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base.
 
 
Lowest and Highest Annual Cost Table. Because your Contract is customizable, the
choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of
owning your Contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could
pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take
withdrawals from the Contract.
 
 
Lowest Annual Cost: $1,026
Highest Annual Cost: $6,615
 
 
Assumes:
Assumes:
 
 
•Investment of $100,000
•5% annual appreciation
•Least expensive fund fees and
expenses
•No optional benefits
•No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals
•No sales charges or advisory fees
•Investment of $100,000
•5% annual appreciation
•Most expensive combination of
optional benefits and fund fees and
expenses
•No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals
•No sales charges or advisory fees
 
5
 
RISKS
Location in
Prospectus
Risk of Loss
•You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal.
•Principal Risks
•Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
Not a Short-Term
Investment
•This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for
the investor who needs ready access to cash.
•The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections mean
the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term investment horizon.
•Withdrawals are subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.
•Principal Risks
•Surrender and
Withdrawals
•Fee Tables
•Living Benefit
Riders
Risks Associated
with Investment
Options
•An investment in this Contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance
of the investment options you choose. Performance can vary depending on the
performance of the investment options available under the Contract.
•Each investment option (including the fixed account option) has its own unique risks.
•You should review the investment options before making an investment decision.
•Principal Risks
•Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
Insurance
Company Risks
•An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to Lincoln Life. Any
obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the
Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress,
we may not be able to meet our obligations to you. More information about Lincoln
Life, including our financial strength ratings, is available upon request by calling 1-
800-454-6265 or visiting www.LincolnFinancial.com.
•Principal Risks
 
RESTRICTIONS
Location in
Prospectus
Investments
•The frequency of transfers between investment options is restricted. There are also
restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option
and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option.
•We reserve the right to remove or substitute any funds as investment options that
are available under the Contract.
•You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers between investment options
per Contract Year. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be
restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional
benefit.
•Principal Risks
•Investments of
the Variable
Annuity
Account
Optional Benefits
•Optional benefits may limit or restrict the investment options that you may select
under the Contract. We may change these restrictions in the future.
•Optional benefit availability may vary by state of issue or selling broker-dealer.
•Excess Withdrawals may reduce the value of an optional benefit by an amount
greater than the value withdrawn or result in termination of the benefit.
•You are required to have a certain level of Contract Value for some new rider
elections.
•We may modify or stop offering an optional benefit that is currently available at any
time.
•If you elect certain optional benefits, you may be limited in the amount of Purchase
Payments that you can make (and when).
•If you elect to pay third-party advisory fees out of your Contract Value, this deduction
may reduce the Death Benefit(s) and other guaranteed benefits, and may be subject
to federal and state income taxes and a 10% federal penalty tax.
•The Contracts
•Living Benefit
Riders
•Death Benefits
•Advisory Fee
Withdrawals
•Federal Tax
Matters –
Payment of
Investment
Advisory Fees
•Appendix B –
Investment
Requirements
•Appendix C –
Discontinued
Living Benefit
Riders
6
 
TAXES
Location in
Prospectus
Tax Implications
•Consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in
and payments received under this Contract.
•If you purchase the Contract through a tax-qualified plan or IRA, you do not get any
additional tax benefit under the Contract.
•Earnings on your Contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when you withdraw
them, and you may have to pay a penalty if you take a withdrawal before age 59½.
•Federal Tax
Matters
 
CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
Location in
Prospectus
Exchanges
•You should only exchange your contract if you determine, after comparing the
features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the
new Contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.
•The Contracts -
Replacement
of Existing
Insurance
Overview of the Contract
Purpose of the Contract
The Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM variable annuity contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide income over a certain period of time or for life, subject to certain conditions. The Contract can supplement your retirement income by providing a stream of income payments during the payout phase. The benefits offered under the Contract may be a variable or fixed amount, if available, or a combination of both. The Contract also offers a Death Benefit payable to your designated Beneficiaries upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.
This Contract may be appropriate if you have a long-term investment horizon. It is not intended for people who may need to make early or frequent withdrawals or intend to engage in frequent trading in the Subaccounts.
Phases of the Contract
Your Contract has two phases: (1) an accumulation (savings) phase, prior to the Annuity Commencement Date; and (2) a payout (income) phase, after the Annuity Commencement Date.
Accumulation (Savings) Phase. To help you accumulate assets during the accumulation phase, you can invest your payments and earnings in:
•
The variable options available under the Contract, each of which has an underlying mutual fund with its own investment objective, strategies, and risks; investment adviser(s); expense ratio; and performance history; and
•
A fixed account option, if available, which guarantees principal and a minimum interest rate.
A list of funds in which you currently can invest is provided in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract.
Annuity (Income) Phase. You can elect to annuitize your Contract and turn your Contract Value into a stream of income payments (sometimes called Annuity Payouts), at which time the accumulation phase of the Contract ends. These payments may continue for a fixed period of years, for your entire life, or for the longer of a fixed period or your life. The payments may also be fixed or variable. Variable payments will vary based on the performance of the funds that you choose.
If you annuitize, your investments will be converted to income payments and you may no longer be able to choose to make withdrawals from your Contract. All benefits (including guaranteed minimum Death Benefits and living benefits) terminate upon annuitization.
However, several Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract provide lifetime income payments that may be guaranteed, and still allow you to make withdrawals and be eligible for a Death Benefit. Withdrawals that exceed a Protected Income Amount are Excess Withdrawals that will reduce and could eliminate the income payments and other benefits of the rider, including access to a Death Benefit.
Primary Features and Options of the Contract
Accessing your money. During the Accumulation Phase you can surrender the Contract or withdraw part of the Contract Value. If you withdraw early, you may have to pay a surrender charge, an Interest Adjustment may apply and/or you may incur a tax penalty if you are younger than 59½.
Tax treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally tax-deferred. You are taxed only when: (1) you take a withdrawal or surrender; (2) you receive an income payment from the Contract; or (3) upon payment of a Death Benefit.
7
Death Benefits. Your Contract includes a Death Benefit that will be paid upon the death of either the Contractowner or the Annuitant. Optional Death Benefits that pay different amounts and have different fees may be available.
Optional Living Benefit Riders. For an additional fee, you may be able to purchase one of the Living Benefit Riders listed below. Each rider offers one of the following:
•
a minimum Annuity Payout:
•
i4LIFE® Advantage with or without the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
The following Living Benefit Riders are no longer available for purchase:
•
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0,
•
Lincoln Wealth PassSM,
•
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage;
•
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk),
•
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), and
•
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit.
These Living Benefit Riders provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth elsewhere in the prospectus.
There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or riders. If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. (These Investment Requirements are explained in Appendix B- Investment Requirements.)
Additional Services. The additional services listed below are available under the Contract for no additional charge (unless otherwise indicated).
•
Dollar-cost averaging (DCA) allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or certain Subaccounts into other Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.
•
Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount.
•
Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable Interest Adjustments (as well as taxes and tax penalties).
•
Fees Associated with Fee-Based Financial Plans. You may provide authorization to have your advisory fees paid to your financial professional's investment firm from your Contract Value. Advisory Fee Withdrawals may not impact benefits and values under a Death Benefit or Living Benefit Rider or be treated as a distribution for federal tax purposes under certain conditions.
If you elect to pay a third-party advisory fee out of your Contract Value, this deduction may reduce the Death Benefit(s) and other guaranteed benefits, and may be subject to federal and state income taxes and a 10% federal penalty tax. See The Contracts – Death Benefits and Advisory Fee Withdrawals and Federal Tax Matters – Payment of Investment Advisory Fees.
8
Fee Tables
The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the Contract. Please refer to your Contract Specification page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected. These charges do not reflect any advisory fees paid to a financial intermediary from Contract Value or other assets of the Contractowner. If such charges were reflected, the ongoing fees and expenses would be higher.
The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the Contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the Contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options, and/or the fixed account (if available). State premium taxes may also be deducted.
 
TRANSACTION EXPENSES
  
There are no sales charges, deferred sales charges, or surrender charges associated with this Contract. We may apply an
Interest Adjustment to amounts being withdrawn, surrendered or transferred from a Guaranteed Period account (except for
dollar cost averaging and Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage). See Fixed Side of the Contract.
 
 
The next table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay each year during the time that you own the Contract (not including fund fees and expenses). If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.
 
ANNUAL CONTRACT EXPENSES
  
Base Contract Expenses (as a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts)1
 
 
Account Value Death Benefit
 
0.60%
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit
 
0.65%
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB)
 
0.90%
Estate Enhancement Benefit (EEB)
 
1.10%
 
 
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Optional Benefit Expenses (Protected Lifetime Income Fees)
 
 
Lincoln Wealth PassSM:2
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
 
 
Age at Issue 0 – 65
2.25%
N/A
Age at Issue 66 – 80
2.25%
N/A
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0:3, 4
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
2.00%
2.00%
Current Annual Charge
1.25%
1.50%
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage:5
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Charge
1.50%
1.50%
Current Annual Charge
1.00%
1.25%
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk):6, 7
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Charge
2.00%
2.00%
Current Annual Charge
1.25%
1.50%
i4LIFE® Advantage:8
 
 
Current Annual Charge
0.40%
0.40%
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit:9
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Charge
2.25%
2.45%
Current Annual Charge
1.10%
1.30%
 
 
 
 
 
 
9
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4):9
 
 
Guaranteed Maximum Charge
2.00%
2.00%
Current Annual Charge
0.95%
1.15%
1
Each base contract expense includes an administrative charge of 0.10%.
2
As an annualized percentage of the Protected Amount, as increased by subsequent Purchase Payments and decreased by Excess Withdrawals. This charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current protected lifetime income fee rate will be less than or equal to the stated maximum charge rate and will be disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for more information.
3
As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any applicable step-ups and enhancements and decreased by Excess Withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value proportionately on a quarterly basis. See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for more information about your Living Benefit Rider.
4
The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000 or (c) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary.
5
As an annualized percentage of the Guaranteed Amount, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and step-ups and decreased by withdrawals. This charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.
6
As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements and decreased by withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. See Charges and Other Deductions – 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) for more information.
7
The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above (a) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary; or (b) upon the earlier of (1) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (2) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000.
8
As an annualized percentage of Account Value, computed daily. This charge is assessed on and after the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and is added to your base contract expense. These charges continue during the Access Period. During the Lifetime Income Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate of 0.40% is added to the Account Value Death Benefit base contract expense. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge for more information.
9
These charges are added to i4LIFE® Advantage charges to comprise the total charges. During the Lifetime Income Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is the Account Value Death Benefit base contract expense plus the i4LIFE® Advantage charge. The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the next automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income
Benefit Charge for more information.  
The next item shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses charged by the funds that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the Contract. A complete list of funds available under the Contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in an appendix to this prospectus. See Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. 
Annual Fund Expenses
Minimum
Maximum
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including
management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other
expenses before reimbursements.
0.23
%
3.73
%
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including
management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other
expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements.1
0.23
%
1.25
%
1
Any expense waivers or reimbursements will remain in effect until at least April 30, 2025, and can only be terminated early with approval by the fund’s board of directors.
EXAMPLES
The following Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual fund fees and expenses.
This Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the maximum fees and expenses of any of the funds and that i4LIFE® Advantage with the EGMDB Death Benefit and Select Guaranteed Income Benefit at the guaranteed maximum charge are in effect. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:
1) If you surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$7,387
$21,616
$35,147
$66,147
2) If you annuitize or do not surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 
10
1 year
3 years
5 years
10 years
$7,387
$21,616
$35,147
$66,147
For more information, see Charges and Other Deductions in this prospectus, and the prospectuses for the funds. Premium taxes may also apply, although they do not appear in the examples. These Examples do not reflect any advisory fees paid to a financial intermediary from the Contract Value or other assets of the Contractowner. If such charges were reflected, the ongoing fees and expenses would be higher. For more details, see Advisory Fee Withdrawals. Different fees and expenses not reflected in the examples may be imposed during a period in which Annuity Payouts are made. See Annuity Payouts. These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be more or less than those shown.
Principal Risks
The principal risks of investing in the Contract include:
Risk of Loss. You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal. Neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract.
Short-Term Investment Risk. This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections also mean that the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term horizon.
Variable Option Risk. You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Subaccounts, which invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, your Contract Value goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. Each underlying fund is subject to its own investment risks. When you invest in a Subaccount, you are exposed to the investment risks of the underlying fund.
Investment Requirements Risk. If you elect an optional benefit, you may be subject to Investment Requirements, which means you may not be permitted to invest in certain investment options or you may be permitted to invest in certain investment options only to a limited extent. Failing to satisfy applicable Investment Requirements may result in the termination of your optional benefit. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under an optional benefit. In turn, your compliance with the Investment Requirements could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits.
Managed Volatility Fund Risk. Certain underlying funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Likewise, there are additional costs associated with the Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders, which can limit the Contract’s upside participation in the markets. Many of these funds are included in the Investment Requirements associated with Living Benefit Riders. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits. For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the funds’ prospectuses.
Withdrawal Risk (Illiquidity Risk). You should carefully consider the risks associated with taking a withdrawal or surrender under the Contract. The proceeds of your withdrawal or surrender may be subject to ordinary income taxes, including a tax penalty if you are younger than age 59½.
You should also consider the impact that a withdrawal may have on the standard and optional benefits under your Contract. For example, under certain Living Benefit Riders, excess or early withdrawals may reduce the value of the guaranteed benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit.
Transfer Risk. Your ability to transfer amounts between investment options is subject to restrictions. You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers per Contract Year. There are also restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option. If permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional benefit.
Purchase Payment Risk. Your ability to make additional Purchase Payments may be restricted under the Contract, depending on the version of the Contract that you own, the optional benefits that you have elected, and other factors. You must obtain our approval for Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more. This amount includes total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by us or our affiliates (excluding any version of Lincoln Investor Advantage®, Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level
11
Advantage 2SM contracts) for the same owner, joint owner, Annuitant, or Secondary Life. We reserve the right to further limit, restrict or suspend the ability to make additional Purchase Payments under the Contract.
If you elect a Living Benefit Rider (other than any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit), after the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year.
If you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional Purchase Payments will be allowed at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional Purchase Payments will be allowed after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for nonqualified contracts. For more information about these restrictions and limitations, see The Contracts – Purchase Payments.
Deduction of Advisory Fee Risk. For contracts purchased as part of a Fee-Based Financial Plan, the deduction of advisory fees from Contract Value may reduce the Death Benefit and other guaranteed benefits, and may be subject to federal and state income taxes and a 10% federal penalty tax. See The Contracts – Advisory Fee Withdrawals.
Election of Optional Benefit Risk. There are a variety of optional benefits under the Contract that are designed for different financial goals and to protect against different financial risks. There is a risk that you may not choose the benefit or benefits that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and circumstances. In addition, if you elect an optional benefit and do not use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that did not provide a financial return. There is also a risk that a financial return of an optional benefit, if any, will ultimately be less than the amount you paid for the benefit. You should consult with your financial professional to determine which optional benefits (if any) are appropriate for you.
Fee and Expense Risk. You are subject to the risk that we may increase certain contract fees and charges, and that underlying fund expenses may increase.
Financial Strength and Claims-Paying Ability Risk. An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to us, Lincoln Life. Any obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress, we may not be able to meet our obligations to you.
Cybersecurity and Business Interruption Risks. We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our annuity business. Because our business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyber-attacks, including ransomware and malware attacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, loss, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. The risk of cyber-attacks may be higher during periods of geopolitical turmoil. Such systems failures and cyber-attacks affecting us, any third-party administrator, the underlying funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the underlying funds, impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit value, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines, litigation, and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cyber security risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may cause the funds underlying your Contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your Contract due to system disruptions, cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future.
In addition to cyber security risks, we are exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, and terrorist acts, any of which could adversely affect our ability to conduct business. A natural or man-made disaster, including a pandemic (such as COVID-19), could affect the ability or willingness of our employees or the employees of our service providers to perform their job responsibilities. They could also result in our business operations being less efficient than under normal circumstances and could lead to delays in our processing of contract-related transactions, including orders from Contractowners. Disasters may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, impact our ability to calculate accumulation unit values, or have other possible negative impacts. They may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may negatively affect the value of the underlying funds and the value of your Contract. There can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters.
Financial Statements
The December 31, 2023 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2023 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are located in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI). Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI are provided on the last page of this prospectus.
12
Investments of the Variable Annuity Account
You decide the Subaccount(s) to which you allocate Purchase Payments. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of each fund. You may change your allocation without penalty or charges. Shares of the funds will be sold at net asset value with no initial sales charge to the VAA in order to fund the contracts. The funds are required to redeem fund shares at net asset value upon our request.
Descriptions of the Funds
Information regarding each fund, including (1) its name, (2) its type or investment objective, (3) its investment adviser and any sub-investment adviser, (4) current expenses, and (5) performance is available in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. Each fund has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the fund. Paper or electronic copies of the fund prospectuses may be obtained by contacting our Home Office or visiting www.lfg.com/VAprospectus.
Certain Payments We Receive with Regard to the Funds
With respect to a fund, including affiliated funds, the adviser and/or distributor, or an affiliate thereof, may make payments to us (or an affiliate). It is anticipated that such payments will be based on a percentage of assets of the particular fund attributable to the contracts along with certain other variable contracts issued or administered by us (or an affiliate). These percentages are negotiated and vary with each fund. Some advisers and/or distributors may pay us significantly more than other advisers and/or distributors and the amount we receive may be substantial. These percentages currently range up to 0.30%, and as of the date of this prospectus, we were receiving payments from each fund family. We (or our affiliates) may profit from these payments or use these payments for a variety of purposes, including payment of expenses that we (and our affiliates) incur in promoting, marketing, and administering the contracts. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the investment advisory fee deducted from fund assets. Contractowners, through their indirect investment in the funds, bear the costs of these investment advisory fees (see the funds' prospectuses for more information). Additionally, a fund's adviser and/or distributor or its affiliates may provide us with certain services that assist us in the distribution of the contracts.
In addition to the payments described above, most of the funds offered as part of this Contract make payments to us under their distribution plans (12b-1 plans) for the marketing and distribution of fund shares. The payment rates range up to 0.25% based on the amounts of assets invested in those funds. Payments made out of the assets of the fund will reduce the amount of assets that otherwise would be available for investment, and will reduce the fund’s investment return. The dollar amount of future asset-based fees is not predictable because these fees are a percentage of the fund’s average net assets, which can fluctuate over time. If, however, the value of the fund goes up, then so would the payment to us (or our affiliates). Conversely, if the value of the funds goes down, payments to us or our affiliates would decrease.
Selection of the Funds
We select the funds offered through the Contract based on several factors, including, without limitation, asset class coverage, the strength of the manager’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance, the capability and qualification of each sponsoring investment firm, and whether the fund is affiliated with us.
As noted above, a factor we may consider during the initial selection process is whether the fund (or an affiliate, investment adviser or distributor of the fund) being evaluated is an affiliate of ours and whether we are compensated for providing administrative, marketing, and/or support services that would otherwise be provided by the fund, its investment adviser or its distributor.
Some funds pay us significantly more than others and the amount we receive may be substantial. We often receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than one that is not affiliated with us. These factors give us an incentive to select a fund that yields more revenue, and this is often an affiliated fund.
We may also consider the ability of the fund to help manage volatility and our risks associated with the guarantees we provide under the Contract and under optional riders, especially the Living Benefit Riders.
We review each fund periodically after it is selected. We reserve the right to remove a fund or restrict allocation of additional Purchase Payments to a fund if we determine the fund no longer meets one or more of the factors and/or if the fund has not attracted significant Contractowner assets.
Finally, when we develop a variable annuity product in cooperation with a fund family or distributor (e.g., a “private label” product), we generally will include funds based on recommendations made by the fund family or distributor, whose selection criteria may differ from our selection criteria. Certain funds offered as part of this Contract have similar investment objectives and policies to other portfolios managed by the adviser. The investment results of the funds, however, may be higher or lower than the other portfolios that are managed by the adviser or sub-adviser. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the funds will be comparable to the investment results of any other portfolio managed by the adviser or sub-adviser, if applicable.
13
Certain funds invest their assets in other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both fund levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as funds of funds or master-feeder funds, which may have higher expenses than funds that invest directly in debt or equity securities. An adviser affiliated with us manages some of the available funds of funds. Our affiliates may promote the benefits of such funds to Contractowners and/or suggest that Contractowners consider whether allocating some or all of their Contract Value to such portfolios is consistent with their desired investment objectives. In doing so, we may be subject to conflicts of interest insofar as we may derive greater revenues from the affiliated fund of funds than certain other funds available to you under your Contract.
Certain funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains; this may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance.
For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus. You should consult with your financial professional to determine which combination of investment choices are appropriate for you.
Fund Shares
We will purchase shares of the funds at net asset value and direct them to the appropriate Subaccounts of the VAA. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate funds to pay Annuity Payouts, Death Benefits, surrender/withdrawal proceeds or for other purposes described in the Contract. If you want to transfer all or part of your investment from one Subaccount to another, we may redeem shares held in the first Subaccount and purchase shares of the other. Redeemed shares are retired, but they may be reissued later.
Shares of the funds are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and may be sold to other insurance companies, for investment of the assets of the Subaccounts established by those insurance companies to fund variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts.
Reinvestment of Dividends and Capital Gain Distributions
All dividends and capital gain distributions of the funds are automatically reinvested in shares of the distributing funds at their net asset value on the date of distribution. Dividends are not paid out to Contractowners as additional units, but are reflected as changes in unit values.
Addition, Deletion or Substitution of Investments
We reserve the right, within the law, to make certain changes to the structure and operation of the VAA at our discretion and without your consent. We may add, delete, or substitute funds for all Contractowners or only for certain classes of Contractowners. New or substitute funds may have different fees and expenses, and may only be offered to certain classes of Contractowners.
Substitutions may be made with respect to existing investments or the investment of future Purchase Payments, or both. In the event of a substitution, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be allocated to the substitute fund. Any future allocations to the substitute fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless otherwise instructed by you. If we don’t have instructions from you on file, your Purchase Payments will be allocated to the substitute fund.
We may close Subaccounts to allocations of Purchase Payments or Contract Value, or both, at any time in our sole discretion. The funds, which sell their shares to the Subaccounts pursuant to participation agreements, also may terminate these agreements and discontinue offering their shares to the Subaccounts. In the event of a fund closure, any Contract Value you have invested in the closed fund will remain in that fund until you transfer it elsewhere. Any future allocation to the closed fund will be allocated in accordance with the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.
In addition, a Subaccount may become unavailable due to the liquidation of its underlying fund portfolio. To the extent permitted by applicable law, upon notice to you and unless you otherwise instruct us, we will re-allocate any Contract Value in the liquidated fund to the money market subaccount. Any future allocations to the liquidated fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.
From time to time, certain underlying funds may merge with other funds. If a merger of an underlying fund occurs, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be merged into the surviving underlying fund. Any future allocations, including future Purchase Payments, to the merged fund will automatically be allocated to the surviving underlying fund unless you instruct us otherwise.
We may also:
•
remove, combine, or add Subaccounts and make the new Subaccounts available to you at our discretion;
14
•
transfer assets supporting the contracts from one Subaccount to another or from the VAA to another separate account;
•
combine the VAA with other separate accounts and/or create new separate accounts;
•
deregister the VAA under the 1940 Act; and
•
operate the VAA as a management investment company under the 1940 Act or as any other form permitted by law.
We may modify the provisions of the contracts to reflect changes to the Subaccounts and the VAA and to comply with applicable law. We will not make any changes without any necessary approval by the SEC. We will also provide you written notice.
Charges and Other Deductions
We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder.
Our administrative services include:
•
processing applications for and issuing the contracts;
•
processing purchases and redemptions of fund shares as required (including dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and automatic withdrawal services – See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs);
•
maintaining records;
•
administering Annuity Payouts;
•
furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);
•
reconciling and depositing cash receipts;
•
providing contract confirmations;
•
providing toll-free inquiry services; and
•
furnishing telephone and other electronic surrenders, withdrawals and fund transfer services.
The risks we assume include:
•
the risk that lifetime payments from Living Benefit Riders will exceed the Contract Value;
•
the risk that Death Benefits paid will exceed the actual Contract Value;
•
the risk that, if a Guaranteed Income Benefit rider is in effect, the required Regular Income Payments will exceed the Account Value;
•
the risk that Annuitants upon which Annuity Payouts are based live longer than we assumed when we calculated our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the Contract and cannot be changed); and
•
the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which we cannot change).
The amount of a charge may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the description of the charge. Any remaining expenses will be paid from our general account which may consist, among other things, of proceeds derived from base contract expenses deducted from the account. We may profit from one or more of the fees and charges deducted under the Contract. We may use these profits for any corporate purpose, including financing the distribution of the contracts.
Obligations under the contracts that are funded by our general account (rather than the Variable Annuity Account) include (1) the obligation to make lifetime or other benefit payments under Living Benefit Riders that exceed the Contract Value; (2) the obligation to pay Death Benefits that exceed the Contract Value; (3) the obligation to pay Annuity Payouts that exceed the Contract Value. Payment of these benefits and obligations is subject to our claims-paying ability and financial strength. We are also responsible for providing for all of the administrative services necessary in connection with the contracts (and bearing all of the associated expenses).
Deductions from the VAA
A charge is applied to the average daily net asset value of the Subaccounts based on which Death Benefit you choose. Those charges are equal to an annual rate of: 
15
 
Estate
Enhancement
Benefit Rider (EEB)*
Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death
Benefit (EGMDB)
Guarantee of
Principal Death
Benefit
Account Value
Death Benefit
Mortality and expense
risk charge
1.00
%
0.80
%
0.55
%
0.50
%
Administrative charge
0.10
%
0.10
%
0.10
%
0.10
%
Total base contract
expense
1.10
%
0.90
%
0.65
%
0.60
%
* This Death Benefit is no longer available.
Rider Charges
A fee or expense may also be deducted in connection with any benefits added to the Contract by rider or endorsement. The deduction of a rider charge will be noted on your quarterly statement.
i4LIFE® Advantage Charge. While this rider is in effect, there is a daily charge for i4LIFE® Advantage that is based on your Account Value. The annual i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate is 0.40% and is added to your base contract expense.
The initial Account Value is your Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, your Account Value equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and any withdrawals.
If i4LIFE® Advantage is elected at the time the Contract is issued, i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Contract's effective date. Otherwise, i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Periodic Income Commencement Date which is the Valuation Date on which the Regular Income Payment is determined and the beginning of the Access Period. Refer to the i4LIFE® Advantage section for explanations of the Account Value, the Access Period, the Lifetime Income Period, and the Periodic Income Commencement Date.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, there is a fee associated with that rider for as long as the rider is in effect.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge rate will not change after the rider is elected unless there is an automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit during which the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment (described later in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus). At the time of the step-up the annual Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate. See Fee Tables.
If we automatically administer the step-up for you and your charge rate is increased, you may ask us to reverse the step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the date on which the step-up occurred. If we receive notice of your request to reverse the step-up, on a going forward basis, we will decrease the charge rate to the charge rate in effect before the step-up occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed. Future step-ups will continue even after you decline a current step-up. We will provide you with written notice when a step-up has resulted in an increase to the current charge rate so that you may give us timely notice if you wish to reverse a step-up.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate, but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.
Deductions for Premium Taxes
Any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity as a result of the existence of the contracts or the VAA will be deducted from the Contract Value, unless the governmental entity dictates otherwise, when incurred, or at another time of our choosing.
The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation or by judicial action. These premium tax rates generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax rates range from zero to 5%.
Other Charges and Deductions
The surrender, withdrawal or transfer of value during a Guaranteed Period may be subject to the Interest Adjustment, if applicable. See Fixed Side of the Contract.
16
Base contract expenses of 0.60% of the value in the VAA will be assessed on all variable Annuity Payouts, including options that may be offered that do not have a life contingency and therefore no mortality risk. This charge includes the mortality and expense risk and administrative charge. The expense risk is the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges.
There are additional deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of the underlying funds that are more fully described in the prospectuses for the funds. Among these deductions and expenses are 12b-1 fees which reimburse us or an affiliate for certain expenses incurred in connection with certain administrative and distribution support services provided to the funds.
Additional Information
The charges described previously may be reduced or eliminated for any particular contract. However, these reductions may be available only to the extent that we anticipate lower distribution and/or administrative expenses, or that we perform fewer sales or administrative services than those originally contemplated in establishing the level of those charges, or when required by law. Lower distribution and administrative expenses may be the result of economies associated with:
•
the use of mass enrollment procedures,
•
the performance of administrative or sales functions by the employer,
•
the use by an employer of automated techniques in submitting deposits or information related to deposits on behalf of its employees, or
•
any other circumstances which reduce distribution or administrative expenses.
The exact amount of charges and fees applicable to a particular contract will be stated in that contract.
The Contracts
Purchase of Contracts
If you wish to purchase a Contract, you may submit an application to our Home Office. When we receive your application, we decide whether to accept or reject it. If the application is accepted, a Contract is prepared and executed by our legally authorized officers. The Contract is then sent to you directly. The purchase of multiple contracts with identical Contractowners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries will be allowed only upon Home Office approval.
When a completed application and all other information necessary for processing a purchase order is received in Good Order at our Home Office, an initial Purchase Payment will be priced no later than two business days after we receive the order. If you submit your application and/or initial Purchase Payment to your financial professional, we will not begin processing your purchase order until we receive the application and initial Purchase Payment from your financial professional’s broker-dealer. While attempting to finish an incomplete application, we may hold the initial Purchase Payment for no more than five business days unless we receive your consent to retain the payment until the application is completed. If the incomplete application cannot be completed within those five days and we have not received your consent, you will be informed of the reasons, and the Purchase Payment will be returned immediately. Once the application is complete, we will allocate your initial Purchase Payment within two business days.
Who Can Invest
To apply for a Contract, you must be of legal age in a state where the contracts may be lawfully sold and also be eligible to participate in any of the qualified and nonqualified plans for which the contracts are designed. At the time of issue, the Contractowner, joint owner and Annuitant must be under age 86. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available at all ages. Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person who opens an account in an effort to help the government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities. When you open an account, we will ask for your name, address, date of birth, and other information that will allow us to identify you. We may also ask to see your driver's license, photo i.d., or other identifying documents.
In accordance with anti-money laundering laws and federal economic sanction policy, the Company may be required in a given instance to reject a Purchase Payment and/or freeze a Contractowner’s account. This means we could refuse to honor requests for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders or Death Benefits. Once frozen, monies would be moved from the VAA to an interest-bearing account maintained solely for the Contractowner, and held in that account until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator.
Do not purchase this Contract if you plan to use it, or any of its riders, for speculation, arbitrage, viatical arrangement, or other similar investment scheme. The Contract may not be resold, traded on any stock exchange, or sold on any secondary market.
If you are purchasing the Contract through a tax-favored arrangement, including traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs, you should consider carefully the costs and benefits of the Contract (including annuity income benefits) before purchasing the Contract, since the tax-favored arrangement itself provides tax-deferred growth.
17
Replacement of Existing Insurance
Careful consideration should be given prior to surrendering or withdrawing money from an existing insurance contract to purchase a Contract described in this prospectus. Surrender charges may be imposed on your existing contract. The benefits offered under this Contract may be less favorable or more favorable than the benefits offered under your current contract. It also may have different charges. You should consult with your financial professional and/or your tax advisor prior to making an exchange. Cash surrenders from an existing contract may be subject to tax and tax penalties.
Purchase Payments
You may make Purchase Payments to the Contract at any time, prior to the Annuity Commencement Date, subject to certain conditions. You are not required to make any additional Purchase Payments after the initial Purchase Payment. The minimum initial Purchase Payment is $10,000. The minimum annual amount for additional Purchase Payments is $300. Please contact the Home Office or your financial professional about making additional Purchase Payments since the requirements of your state may vary. The minimum payment to the Contract at any one time must be at least $100 ($25 if transmitted electronically). If a Purchase Payment is submitted that does not meet the minimum amount, we will contact you to ask whether additional money will be sent, or whether we should return the Purchase Payment to you.
Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more are subject to Home Office approval. This amount takes into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding any version of Lincoln Investor Advantage®, Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2SM contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant. If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, you may be subject to further restrictions in terms of your ability to make additional Purchase Payments, as more fully described below. If you stop making Purchase Payments, the Contract will remain in force, however, we may terminate the Contract as allowed by your state's non-forfeiture law for individual deferred annuities. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders. Purchase Payments may be made or, if stopped, resumed at any time until the Annuity Commencement Date, the surrender of the Contract, or the death of the Contractowner, whichever comes first.
After the first anniversary of a Living Benefit Rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed:
•
at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit; or
•
at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit on a nonqualified contract.
For more information about these restrictions and limitations, see The Contracts – Purchase Payments. State variations may apply.
In addition to the specific Purchase Payment restrictions and limitations immediately above, upon advance written notice, we reserve the right to further limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract.
These restrictions and limitations will limit your ability to increase your Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage with any version of Guaranteed Income Benefit) and/or increase the amount of any guaranteed benefit under a Living Benefit Rider by making additional Purchase Payments to the Contract. You should carefully consider these limitations and restrictions, and any other limitations and restrictions of the Contract, and how they may impact your long-term investment plans, especially if you intend to increase Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit) by making additional Purchase Payments over a long period of time. Please contact the Home Office or your financial professional, and refer to the Living Benefit Riders section of this prospectus for additional information on any restrictions that may apply to your Living Benefit Rider. State variations may apply.
Valuation Date
Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued once daily at the close of trading (normally, 4:00 p.m., New York time) on each day the New York Stock Exchange is open (Valuation Date). On any date other than a Valuation Date, the Accumulation Unit value and the Annuity Unit value will not change.
Allocation of Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments allocated to the variable side of the contract are placed into the VAA’s Subaccounts, according to your instructions. You may also allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed account, if available. In the absence of instructions accompanying a Purchase Payment or otherwise not being in Good Order, we will allocate a Purchase Payment in the same manner as your last Purchase Payment or, if not possible, contact you or your financial professional for additional information.
The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into any one Subaccount is $20. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into a Guaranteed Period of the fixed account is $2,000, subject to state approval.
18
Purchase Payments received from you or your broker-dealer or firm in Good Order at our Home Office prior to the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. Purchase Payments received in Good Order after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. Purchase Payments submitted to your financial professional will generally not be processed by us until they are received from your financial professional’s broker-dealer or firm. If your broker-dealer or firm submits your Purchase Payment to us through the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) or, pursuant to terms agreeable to us, uses a proprietary order placement system to submit your Purchase Payment to us, and your Purchase Payment was placed with your broker-dealer or firm prior to market close, then we will use the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date when processing your Purchase Payment. Purchase Payments placed with your broker-dealer or firm after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, Purchase Payments received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not impacted by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the underlying fund’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the VAA and the underlying funds.
If an underlying fund imposes restrictions with respect to the acceptance of Purchase Payments, allocations or transfers, we reserve the right to reject an allocation or transfer request at any time the underlying fund notifies us of such a restriction. We will notify you if your allocation request is or becomes subject to such restrictions.
Valuation of Accumulation Units
Purchase Payments allocated to the VAA are converted into Accumulation Units. This is done by dividing the amount allocated by the value of an Accumulation Unit for the Valuation Period during which the Purchase Payments are allocated to the VAA. The Accumulation Unit value for each Subaccount was or will be established at the inception of the Subaccount. It may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period. Accumulation Unit values are affected by investment performance of the funds, fund expenses, and the contract charges. The Accumulation Unit value for a Subaccount for a later Valuation Period is determined as follows:
1.
The total value of the fund shares held in the Subaccount is calculated by multiplying the number of fund shares owned by the Subaccount at the beginning of the Valuation Period by the net asset value per share of the fund at the end of the Valuation Period, and adding any dividend or other distribution of the fund if an ex-dividend date occurs during the Valuation Period; minus
2.
The liabilities of the Subaccount at the end of the Valuation Period; these liabilities include daily charges imposed on the Subaccount, and may include a charge or credit with respect to any taxes paid or reserved for by us that we determine result from the operations of the VAA; and
3.
The result is divided by the number of Subaccount units outstanding at the beginning of the Valuation Period.
The daily charges imposed on a Subaccount for any Valuation Period are equal to the daily base contract expense multiplied by the number of calendar days in the Valuation Period. Contracts with different features have different daily charges, and therefore, will have different corresponding Accumulation Unit values on any given day. In certain circumstances (for example, when separate account assets are less than $1,000), and when permitted by law, it may be prudent for us to use a different standard industry method for this calculation, called the Net Investment Factor method. We will achieve substantially the same result using either method.
Transfers On or Before the Annuity Commencement Date
After the first 30 days from the effective date of your Contract, you may transfer all or a portion of your investment from one Subaccount to another. A transfer among Subaccounts involves the surrender of Accumulation Units in one Subaccount and the purchase of Accumulation Units in the other Subaccount. A transfer will be done using the respective Accumulation Unit values determined at the end of the Valuation Date on which the transfer request is received.
Transfers (among the variable Subaccounts and as permitted between the variable and fixed accounts) are limited to 12 per Contract Year unless otherwise authorized by us. This limit does not apply to transfers made under the automatic transfer programs of dollar cost averaging or portfolio rebalancing. See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs. These transfer rights and restrictions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Access Period (the time period during which you may make withdrawals from the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value). See i4LIFE® Advantage.
The minimum amount which may be transferred between Subaccounts is $300 (or the entire amount in the Subaccount, if less than $300). If the transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total balance of the Subaccount.
A transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. A transfer request may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. Our address, telephone number, and Internet address are on the first page of this prospectus. Requests for transfers will be processed on the Valuation Date that they are received when they are received in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time).
19
If we receive a transfer request in Good Order after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances transfers received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.
We may defer or reject a transfer request that is subject to a restriction imposed by an underlying fund.
If your Contract offers a fixed account, you may also transfer all or any part of the Contract Value from the Subaccount(s) to the fixed side of the contract, except during periods when (if permitted by your Contract) we have discontinued accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract. The minimum amount which can be transferred to a fixed account is $2,000 or the total amount in the Subaccount if less than $2,000. However, if a transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total amount to the fixed side of the contract.
You may also transfer part of the Contract Value from a fixed account to the Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:
•
total fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and
•
the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.
Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer all of the Contract Value in the fixed accounts to the Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Transfers of all or a portion of a fixed account (other than automatic transfer programs and i4LIFE® Advantage transfers) may be subject to Interest Adjustments, if applicable. For a description of the Interest Adjustment, see the Fixed Side of the Contract - Guaranteed Periods and Interest Adjustment.
Transfers may be delayed as permitted by the 1940 Act. See Delay of Payments.
Telephone and Electronic Transactions
A surrender, withdrawal, or transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. These transactions may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. In order to prevent unauthorized or fraudulent transfers, we may require certain identifying information before we will act upon instructions. We may also assign the Contractowner a Personal Identification Number (PIN) to serve as identification. We will not be liable for following instructions we reasonably believe are genuine. Telephone and other electronic requests will be recorded and written confirmation of all transactions will be mailed or sent electronically to the Contractowner on the next Valuation Date.
Please note that the telephone and/or electronic devices may not always be available. Any telephone, fax machine, or other electronic device, whether it is yours, your service provider’s, or your financial professional’s, can experience outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing of your request. Although we have taken precautions to limit these problems, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you should make your request by writing to our Home Office.
Market Timing
Frequent, large, or short-term transfers among Subaccounts and the fixed account, such as those associated with “market timing” transactions, can affect the funds and their investment returns. Such transfers may dilute the value of the fund shares, interfere with the efficient management of the fund's portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs of the funds. As an effort to protect our Contractowners and the funds from potentially harmful trading activity, we utilize certain market timing policies and procedures (the “Market Timing Procedures”). Our Market Timing Procedures are designed to detect and prevent such transfer activity among the Subaccounts and the fixed account that may affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders.
In addition, the funds may have adopted their own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares. The prospectuses for the funds describe any such policies and procedures, which may be more or less restrictive than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other funds and the Market Timing Procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent transfers among Subaccounts. While we reserve the right to enforce these policies and procedures, Contractowners and other persons with interests under the Contract should be aware that we may not have the contractual authority or the operational capacity to apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the funds. However, under SEC rules, we are required to: (1) enter into a written agreement with each fund or its principal underwriter that obligates us to provide to the fund promptly upon request certain information about the trading activity of individual Contractowners, and (2) execute instructions from the fund to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by specific Contractowners who violate the excessive trading policies established by the fund.
You should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the funds generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. The omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the funds’ ability to apply their respective disruptive trading policies and procedures.
20
We cannot guarantee that the funds (and thus our Contractowners) will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the funds. In addition, if a fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more transfer requests from Contractowners engaged in disruptive trading activity, the fund may reject the entire omnibus order.
Our Market Timing Procedures detect potential “market timers” by examining the number of transfers made by Contractowners within given periods of time. In addition, managers of the funds might contact us if they believe or suspect that there is market timing. If requested by a fund company, we may vary our Market Timing Procedures from Subaccount to Subaccount to comply with specific fund policies and procedures.
We may increase our monitoring of Contractowners who we have previously identified as market timers. When applying the parameters used to detect market timers, we will consider multiple contracts owned by the same Contractowner if that Contractowner has been identified as a market timer. For each Contractowner, we will investigate the transfer patterns that meet the parameters being used to detect potential market timers. We will also investigate any patterns of trading behavior identified by the funds that may not have been captured by our Market Timing Procedures.
Once a Contractowner has been identified as a market timer under our Market Timing Procedures, we will notify the Contractowner in writing that future transfers (among the Subaccounts and/or the fixed account) will be temporarily permitted to be made only by original signature sent to us by U.S. mail, first-class delivery for the remainder of the Contract Year (or calendar year if the Contract is an individual contract that was sold in connection with an employer sponsored plan). Overnight delivery or electronic instructions (which may include telephone, facsimile, or Internet instructions) submitted during this period will not be accepted. If overnight delivery or electronic instructions are inadvertently accepted from a Contractowner that has been identified as a market timer, upon discovery, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will impose this “original signature” restriction on that Contractowner even if we cannot identify, in the particular circumstances, any harmful effect from that Contractowner's particular transfers.
Contractowners seeking to engage in frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity may deploy a variety of strategies to avoid detection. Our ability to detect such transfer activity may be limited by operational systems and technological limitations. The identification of Contractowners determined to be engaged in such transfer activity that may adversely affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders involves judgments that are inherently subjective. We cannot guarantee that our Market Timing Procedures will detect every potential market timer. If we are unable to detect market timers, you may experience dilution in the value of your fund shares and increased brokerage and administrative costs in the funds. This may result in lower long-term returns for your investments.
Our Market Timing Procedures are applied consistently to all Contractowners. An exception for any Contractowner will be made only in the event we are required to do so by a court of law. In addition, certain funds available as investment options in your Contract may also be available as investment options for owners of other, older life insurance policies issued by us. Some of these older life insurance policies do not provide a contractual basis for us to restrict or refuse transfers which are suspected to be market timing activity. In addition, because other insurance companies and/or retirement plans may invest in the funds, we cannot guarantee that the funds will not suffer harm from frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity among Subaccounts and the fixed accounts of variable contracts issued by other insurance companies or among investment options available to retirement plan participants.
In our sole discretion, we may revise our Market Timing Procedures at any time without prior notice as necessary to better detect and deter frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, and/or to impose additional or alternate restrictions on market timers (such as dollar or percentage limits on transfers). If we modify our Market Timing Procedures, they will be applied uniformly to all Contractowners or as applicable to all Contractowners investing in underlying funds.
Some of the funds have reserved the right to temporarily or permanently refuse payments or transfer requests from us if, in the judgment of the fund’s investment adviser, the fund would be unable to invest effectively in accordance with its investment objective or policies, or would otherwise potentially be adversely affected. To the extent permitted by applicable law, we reserve the right to defer or reject a transfer request at any time that we are unable to purchase or redeem shares of any of the funds available through the VAA, including any refusal or restriction on purchases or redemptions of the fund shares as a result of the funds' own policies and procedures on market timing activities. If a fund refuses to accept a transfer request we have already processed, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will notify you in writing if we have reversed, restricted or refused any of your transfer requests. Some funds also may impose redemption fees on short-term trading (i.e., redemptions of mutual fund shares within a certain number of business days after purchase). We reserve the right to administer and collect any such redemption fees on behalf of the funds. You should read the funds’ prospectuses for more details on their redemption fees and their ability to refuse or restrict purchases or redemptions of their shares.
Transfers After the Annuity Commencement Date
You may transfer all or a portion of your investment in one Subaccount to another Subaccount or to the fixed side of the contract, as permitted under your Contract. Those transfers will be limited to three times per Contract Year. You may also switch from a variable Annuity Payout to a fixed Annuity Payout. You may not switch from a fixed Annuity Payout to a variable Annuity Payout. Once elected, the fixed Annuity Payout is irrevocable.
These provisions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period. See i4LIFE® Advantage.
21
Ownership
The Contractowner on the date of issue will be the person or entity designated in the contract specifications. The Contractowner of a nonqualified contract may name a joint owner.
As Contractowner, you have all rights under the Contract. According to Indiana law, the assets of the VAA are held for the exclusive benefit of all Contractowners and their designated Beneficiaries; and the assets of the VAA are not chargeable with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. We reserve the right to approve all ownership and Annuitant changes. Nonqualified contracts may not be sold, discounted, or pledged as collateral for a loan or for any other purpose. Qualified contracts are not transferable unless allowed under applicable law. Nonqualified contracts may not be collaterally assigned. Assignments may have an adverse impact on any Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders in this product. We assume no responsibility for the validity or effect of any assignment. Consult your tax advisor about the tax consequences of an assignment.
Joint Ownership
If a Contract has joint owners, the joint owners shall be treated as having equal undivided interests in the Contract. Either owner, independently of the other, may exercise any ownership rights in this Contract. Not more than two owners (an owner and joint owner) may be named and contingent owners are not permitted.
Annuitant
The following rules apply prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You may name only one Annuitant (unless you are a tax-exempt entity, then you can name two joint Annuitants). You (if the Contractowner is a natural person) have the right to change the Annuitant at any time by notifying us in writing of the change. However, we reserve the right to approve all Annuitant changes. This may not be allowed if certain riders are in effect. The new Annuitant must be under age 86 as of the effective date of the change (or, for Annuitant changes on contracts issued prior to February 16, 2016, under age 91). This change may cause a reduction in the Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders. See The Contracts – Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders. A contingent Annuitant may be named or changed by notifying us in writing. Contingent Annuitants are not allowed on contracts owned by non-natural owners. On or after the Annuity Commencement Date, the Annuitant or joint Annuitants may not be changed and contingent Annuitant designations are no longer applicable.
Surrenders and Withdrawals
Before the Annuity Commencement Date, we will allow the surrender of the Contract or a withdrawal of the Contract Value upon your written request on an approved Lincoln distribution request form (available from the Home Office), by fax, or other electronic means. Withdrawal requests may be made by telephone or our website, subject to certain restrictions. All surrenders and withdrawals may be made in accordance with the rules discussed below. Surrender or withdrawal rights after the Annuity Commencement Date depend on the Annuity Payout option selected.
The amount available upon surrender/withdrawal is the Contract Value less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes at the end of the Valuation Period during which the written request for surrender/withdrawal is received in Good Order at the Home Office. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the NYSE (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the NYSE may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, surrender or withdrawal requests received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. The minimum amount which can be withdrawn is $300. Unless a request for withdrawal specifies otherwise, withdrawals will be made from all Subaccounts within the VAA and from the fixed account in the same proportion that the amount of withdrawal bears to the total Contract Value. Surrenders and withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to the Interest Adjustment. See Fixed Side of the Contract. Unless prohibited, surrender/withdrawal payments will be mailed within seven days after we receive a valid written request at the Home Office. The payment may be postponed as permitted by the 1940 Act.
Surrenders and withdrawals may be taxable and, prior to age 59½, subject to a tax penalty. The tax consequences of a surrender/withdrawal are discussed later in this prospectus. See Federal Tax Matters – Taxation of Withdrawals and Surrenders.
Withdrawals may have a negative impact on certain optional living benefits and on certain death benefits, and the impact could be significant. A withdrawal may reduce or even terminate certain benefits.
In addition, withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to an Interest Adjustment, which could have a significant negative impact.
22
Asset Allocation Models
You may allocate your Purchase Payments among a group of Subaccounts that invest in underlying funds within an asset allocation model. Each model invests different percentages of Contract Value in some or all of the Subaccounts currently available within your annuity contract. If you select an asset allocation model, 100% of your Contract Value (and any additional Purchase Payments you make) will be allocated among certain Subaccounts in accordance with the model’s asset allocation strategy. You may not make transfers among the Subaccounts. We will proportionately deduct any withdrawals you make from the Subaccounts in the asset allocation model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model at any time.
This Contract is offered as part of a Fee-Based Financial Plan whereby an investment firm or professional offers investment advice for a fee. It is also sold through broker-dealers who may also be registered as or affiliated with a registered investment advisor. Your financial professional may discuss asset allocation models with you to assist in deciding to allocate your Purchase Payments among the various Subaccounts and/or the fixed account. You should consult with your financial professional whether a model is appropriate for you.
Each of the asset allocation models seeks to meet its investment objective while avoiding excessive risk. The models also strive to achieve diversification among asset classes in order to help provide returns commensurate with a given level of risk over the long-term. There can be no assurance, however, that any of the asset allocation models will achieve its investment objective. If you are seeking a more aggressive strategy, these models are probably not appropriate for you.
The asset allocation models are intended to provide a diversified investment portfolio by combining different asset classes to help it reach its stated investment goal. While diversification may help reduce overall risk, it does not eliminate the risk of loss and it does not protect against loss in a declining market.
In order to maintain the model’s specified Subaccount allocation percentages, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option and you thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a quarterly basis based upon your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. We reserve the right to change the rebalancing frequency at any time, in our sole discretion, but will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change in frequency.
The models are static asset allocation models. This means that they have fixed allocations made up of underlying funds that are offered within your Contract and the percentage allocations will not change over time. Once you have selected an asset allocation model, we will not make any changes to the fund allocation within the model except for the rebalancing described above. If you desire to change your Contract Value or Purchase Payment allocation or percentages to reflect a revised or different model, you must submit new allocation instructions to us. You may terminate a model at any time. There is no additional change from Lincoln for participating in a model.
The election of certain Living Benefit Riders may require that you allocate Purchase Payments in accordance with Investment Requirements that may be satisfied by choosing an asset allocation model. Different requirements and/or restrictions may apply under the individual rider. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements. To the extent you are using a model to satisfy your Investment Requirements, the model is intended, in part, to reduce the risk of investment loss that may require us to use your own assets to make guaranteed payments under the Living Benefit Riders.
The models were designed and prepared by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation (LFIC), which is an affiliate of ours, for use by Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (LFD), the principal underwriter of the contracts. LFD provides models to broker-dealers and financial professionals who may offer the models to their own clients. In making these models and Subaccounts available as investment options under your Contract, LFIC, LFD, and the Company are not providing you with investment advice, nor are they recommending to you any particular model or Subaccount. You should consult with your financial professional to determine whether you should utilize or invest in any model or Subaccount, or whether it is suitable for you based upon your goals, risk tolerance, and time horizon.
If a fund within a model closes to new investors, investors that have been invested before the fund closed may remain in the model. However, the model would no longer be offered to new investors. If a fund within a model liquidates, we may transfer assets from that Subaccount to another Subaccount after providing notice to you. If this transfer occurs, and you own a Living Benefit Rider and are subject to Investment Requirements, you may no longer comply with the Investment Requirements. See the Investment Requirements section for more information. If a fund within a model merges with another fund, we will add the surviving fund to the model.
Benefits Available Under the Contract
The following tables summarize information about the benefits available under the Contract. A detailed description of each benefit follows the table. 
23
Standard Benefits
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
Account Value Death
Benefit
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
Contract Value.
•0.60%
•Poor investment performance could
significantly reduce the benefit.
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Guarantee of Principal
Death Benefit
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals.
•0.65%
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Enhanced Guaranteed
Minimum Death
Benefit (EGMDB)
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value
on any contract anniversary prior to age 81
as adjusted for withdrawals.
•0.90%
•Not available if age 80 or older at the
time of issuance.
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
•Poor investment performance could
significantly reduce and limit potential
increases to the highest Contract Value.
Dollar-Cost Averaging
Allows you to automatically transfer
amounts between certain investment
options on a monthly basis.
None
•Minimum amount to be dollar cost
averaged is $1,500 over any time period
between 3 and 60 months.
•Cannot be used simultaneously with
portfolio rebalancing.
Portfolio Rebalancing
Allows you to automatically reallocate your
Contract Value among investment options
on a periodic basis based on your standing
allocation instructions.
None
•Cannot be used simultaneously with
dollar cost averaging.
Automatic Withdrawal
Service
Allows you to take periodic withdrawals
from your Contract automatically.
None
•Automatically terminates once i4LIFE®
Advantage begins.
Advisory Fee
Withdrawals
Allows you to take withdrawals from your
Contract to pay the advisory fees.
None
•May not be available in all states.
•May not be available for all Living Benefit
Riders.
•The deduction of advisory fees from
Contract Value may reduce the Death
Benefit and other guaranteed benefits
(unless the requirements listed above are
met), and may be subject to federal and
state income taxes and a 10% federal
penalty tax.
 
Optional Benefits – Available for Election
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
i4LIFE® Advantage
Provides:
•Variable periodic Regular Income
Payments for life.
•The ability to make additional
withdrawals and surrender the Contract
during the Access Period.
 
•i4LIFE® Advantage:
0.40% in addition to
the base contract
expense for the
Death Benefit you
have elected.
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
•Restrictions apply to the length of the
Access Period.
•Additional Purchase Payments may be
subject to restrictions.
 
24
Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
Estate Enhancement
Benefit Rider
Provides a Death Benefit equal to the
greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all
Purchase Payments, adjusted for
withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value
on any contract anniversary prior to age 81
(decreased proportionately by subsequent
withdrawals); (4) current Contract Value
plus an amount based on earnings under the
Contract.
•1.10%
•If there are no contract earnings, the
calculations of the Death Benefit using
contract earnings will not be available.
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce
the benefit.
Lincoln Lifetime
IncomeSM Advantage
2.0
Provides:
•Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals;
•An Enhancement to the Protected
Income Base;
•Account Value Step-ups of the Protected
Income Base;
•Age-based increases to the Protected
Annual Income amount
•2.00%
(as a percentage of
Protected Income
Base)
•Investment Requirements apply.
•Subject to a $10 million maximum
across all Living Benefit Riders.
•Excess withdrawals could significantly
reduce or terminate the benefit.
•Any withdrawal may negatively impact or
eliminate the potential for enhancements
or step-ups.
•Purchase Payments and step-ups may
increase fee rate.
•Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
Lincoln Wealth
PassSM
•Provides income payments that
guarantee a return of principal over your
life expectancy.
•Designed for a Beneficiary with Death
Benefit proceeds from another
nonqualified contract, or from a qualified
(IRA and Roth IRA) contract or a
qualified retirement plan if the original
Contractowner died on or before
December 31, 2019.
•2.25%
(as an annualized
percentage of
Protected Amount)
•Investment Requirements apply.
•Excess Withdrawals could significantly
reduce or terminate the benefit.
•Subject to $10 million maximum
Protected Income Base across all Living
Benefit Riders.
•Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
Lincoln
SmartSecurity®
Advantage
Provides:
•A minimum guaranteed amount that you
can withdraw, in installments, from your
Contract. Lifetime periodic withdrawals
may also be available if certain
conditions are met.
•1.50%
(as an annualized
percentage of the
Guaranteed
Amount)
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
•Investment Requirements apply.
•Subject to a $10 million maximum
across all Living Benefit Riders.
•Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
•A step-up of the Guaranteed Amount
may increase the fee rate.
4LATER® Advantage
(Managed Risk)
Provides:
•Protected Income Base which will be
used to establish the amount of the
Guaranteed Income Benefit upon the
election of i4LIFE® Advantage;
•An Enhancement to the Protected
Income Base;
•Account Value Step-ups of the Protected
Income Base.
You must later transition to i4LIFE®
Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit
(Managed Risk) in order to receive a
benefit from 4LATER® Advantage
(Managed Risk).
•2.00% (as a
percentage of
Protected Income
Base)
•Investment Requirements apply.
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
•Not available for purchase with a
qualified contract.
•Subject to a $10 million maximum
Protected Income Base across all Living
Benefit Riders.
•Additional Purchase Payments may be
limited.
•Purchase Payments and step-ups may
increase fee rate.
25
Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit
Purpose
Maximum Fee
Brief Description of Restrictions /
Limitations
i4LIFE® Advantage
Guaranteed Income
Benefit
•Provides a minimum payout floor for
Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE®
Advantage.
•Select Guaranteed
Income Benefit:
2.25%* (single life
option); 2.45%*
(joint life option)
•Guaranteed Income
Benefit (version 4):
2.00%* (single/joint
life option)
*The Guaranteed
Income Benefit
charge is in addition
to the i4LIFE®
Advantage charge
and your base
contract expense.
•Guaranteed Income Benefit limits
available investment options (Investment
Requirements apply).
•Withdrawals could significantly reduce or
terminate the benefit.
•Restrictions apply to the length of the
Access Period.
•Additional Purchase Payments can be
subject to restrictions.
See Appendix C – Discontinued Living Benefit Riders for a description of the discontinued Living Benefit Riders.
Death Benefits
The chart below provides a brief overview of how the Death Benefit proceeds will be distributed if death occurs prior to i4LIFE® Advantage elections or prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Refer to your Contract for the specific provisions applicable upon death. 
upon death of:
and...
and...
Death Benefit proceeds pass to:
Contractowner
There is a surviving joint owner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Joint owner
Contractowner
There is no surviving joint owner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Designated Beneficiary
Contractowner
There is no surviving joint owner
and the Beneficiary predeceases the
Contractowner
The Annuitant is living or deceased
Contractowner's estate
Annuitant
The Contractowner is living
There is no contingent Annuitant
The youngest Contractowner
becomes the contingent Annuitant
and the Contract continues. The
Contractowner may waive* this
continuation and receive the Death
Benefit proceeds.
Annuitant
The Contractowner is living
The contingent Annuitant is living
Contingent Annuitant becomes the
Annuitant and the Contract
continues
Annuitant
The Contractowner is a trust or
other non-natural person**
No contingent Annuitant allowed
with non-natural Contractowner
Designated Beneficiary
 *
Notification from the Contractowner to receive the Death Benefit proceeds must be received within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant.
 **
Death of Annuitant is treated like death of the Contractowner.
A Death Benefit may be payable if the Contractowner (or a joint owner) or Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You can choose the Death Benefit. Only one Death Benefit may be in effect at any one time and this Death Benefit terminates if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage or elect any other annuitization option. Generally, the more expensive the Death Benefit is, the greater the protection.
You should consider the following provisions carefully when designating the Beneficiary, Annuitant, any contingent Annuitant and any joint owner, as well as before changing any of these parties. The identity of these parties under the Contract may significantly affect the amount and timing of the Death Benefit or other amount paid upon a Contractowner's or Annuitant's death.
26
You may designate a Beneficiary during your lifetime and change the Beneficiary by filing a written request with our Home Office. Each change of Beneficiary revokes any previous designation. We reserve the right to request that you send us the Contract for endorsement of a change of Beneficiary.
Upon the death of the Contractowner, a Death Benefit will be paid to the Beneficiary. Upon the death of a joint owner, the Death Benefit will be paid to the surviving joint owner. If the Contractowner is a corporation or other non-individual (non-natural person), the death of the Annuitant will be treated as death of the Contractowner.
If an Annuitant who is not the Contractowner or joint owner dies, then the contingent Annuitant, if named, becomes the Annuitant and no Death Benefit is payable on the death of the Annuitant. If no contingent Annuitant is named, the Contractowner (or younger of joint owners) becomes the Annuitant. Alternatively, a Death Benefit may be paid to the Contractowner (and joint owner, if applicable, in equal shares). Notification of the election of this Death Benefit must be received by us within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant. The Contract terminates when any Death Benefit is paid due to the death of the Annuitant.
If a Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant was added or changed subsequent to the effective date of the Contract (unless the change occurred because of the death of a prior Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant), upon death, we will only pay the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the death claim.
If your Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid.
Account Value Death Benefit. The Account Value Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the Contract Value on the Valuation Date the Death Benefit is approved by us for payment. No additional Death Benefit is provided. Once you have selected this Death Benefit option, it cannot be changed. (Your Contract may refer to this benefit as the Contract Value Death Benefit.) For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000. The Contract Value increases and equals $12,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. The amount of Death Benefit paid equals $12,000.
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is the default Death Benefit under this Contract; this means that if you do not select a Death Benefit, the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit will be automatically selected for you at contract issue. There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit. The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the greater of:
•
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
•
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount (the Protected Annual Income withdrawals under Lincoln Wealth PassSM are excluded) under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0.
For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000. The Contract Value decreases and equals $8,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. Since your principal is guaranteed, the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $10,000.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals and premium taxes, if any.
Subject to state approval, annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not be considered a withdrawal under your Death Benefit calculation of the sum of all Purchase Payments or highest Contract Value. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, but the value of your Death Benefit will not be negatively impacted. For Annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will be treated as a withdrawal under this Death Benefit and reduce your guarantees.
The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit may be discontinued by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the valuation date we receive the request and the Account Value Death Benefit will apply. We will begin deducting the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB). The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of:
•
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
•
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount (the Protected Annual Income withdrawals under Lincoln Wealth PassSM are excluded) under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0; or
•
the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant for whom a death claim is
27
approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value.
The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EGMDB: 
7/3/2024 Initial Deposit / Contract Value
$10,000
7/3/2028 Contract Value
$25,000
7/3/2029 Contract Value
$23,500
The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary, so the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $25,000 on the date the death claim is approved.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals and premium taxes, if any.
Subject to state approval, annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not be considered a withdrawal under your Death Benefit calculation of the sum of all Purchase Payments or highest Contract Value. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, but the value of your Death Benefit will not be negatively impacted. For Annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will be treated as a withdrawal under this Death Benefit and reduce your guarantees.
The EGMDB is not available under contracts issued to a Contractowner, or joint owner or Annuitant, who is age 80 or older at the time of issuance.
There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit. You may discontinue the EGMDB at any time by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the Valuation Date we receive the request, and the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit will apply. We will begin deducting the applicable charge for the new Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.
General Death Benefit Information
Only one of these Death Benefits may be in effect at any one time. Your Death Benefit terminates on and after the Annuity Commencement Date. i4LIFE® Advantage only provides Death Benefit options during the Access Period. There are no Death Benefits during the Lifetime Income Period. Please see the i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefit section of this prospectus for more information.
If there are joint owners, upon the death of the first Contractowner, we will pay a Death Benefit to the surviving joint owner. The surviving joint owner will be treated as the primary, designated Beneficiary. Any other Beneficiary designation on record at the time of death will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary. If the surviving joint owner is the spouse of the deceased joint owner, he/she may continue the Contract as sole Contractowner. Upon the death of the spouse who continues the Contract, we will pay a Death Benefit to the designated Beneficiary(s).
If the Beneficiary is the spouse of the Contractowner, then the spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Contractowner. All Contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.
Should the surviving spouse elect to continue the Contract, a portion of the Death Benefit may be credited to the Contract. Any portion of the Death Benefit that would have been payable (if the Contract had not been continued) that exceeds the current Contract Value on the Valuation Date we approve the claim will be added to the Contract Value. If the Contract is continued in this way, the Death Benefit in effect at the time the Beneficiary elected to continue the Contract will remain as the Death Benefit.
The value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of a claim submitted in Good Order. To be in Good Order, we require all the following:
1.
an original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us; and
2.
written authorization for payment; and
3.
all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).
28
Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.
Unless otherwise provided in the Beneficiary designation, one of the following procedures will take place on the death of a Beneficiary:
•
if any Beneficiary dies before the Contractowner, that Beneficiary’s interest will go to any other Beneficiaries named, according to their respective interests; and/or
•
if no Beneficiary survives the Contractowner, the proceeds will be paid to the Contractowner’s estate.
If the Beneficiary is a minor, court documents appointing the guardian/custodian may be required.
The Beneficiary may choose the method of payment of the Death Benefit unless the Contractowner has already selected the settlement option. If the Contract is a nonqualified contract, the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within five years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary begins receiving, within one year of the Contractowner’s death, the distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy. If the Contract is a qualified contract or IRA, then the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within ten years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary is an “eligible designated beneficiary”. An eligible designated beneficiary may take the Death Benefit distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy, subject to certain additional exceptions.
Upon the death of the Annuitant, Federal tax law requires that an annuity election be made no later than 60 days after we have approved the death claim for payment.
The recipient of a Death Benefit may elect to receive payment either in the form of a lump sum settlement or an Annuity Payout. If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.
Abandoned Property. Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the date a benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a Death Benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the Beneficiary of the Death Benefit, or the Beneficiary does not come forward to claim the Death Benefit in a timely manner, the Death Benefit will be “escheated”. This means that the Death Benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the Beneficiary or the Contractowner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This escheatment is revocable and the state is obligated to pay the Death Benefit (without interest) if your Beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation.
To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your Beneficiary designations, including addresses, if and as they change. You may update your Beneficiary designations by submitting a Beneficiary change form to our Home Office.
Additional Services
These additional services are available to you under your Contract: dollar-cost averaging (DCA), automatic withdrawal service (AWS), and portfolio rebalancing. Currently, there is no charge for these services. However, we reserve the right to impose one after appropriate notice to Contractowners. In order to take advantage of one of these services, you will need to complete the appropriate election form that is available from our Home Office or call 1-877-534-8255. For further detailed information on these services, please see Additional Services in the SAI.
Dollar-Cost Averaging. Dollar-cost averaging allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or select variable Subaccounts into the Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.
You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by completing an election form available from us. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged (DCA’d) is $1,500 over any time period between three and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the Annuity Commencement Date;
•
the value of the amount being DCA’d is depleted; or
•
you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.
We reserve the right to limit certain time periods or to restrict access to this program at any time.
A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program.
29
However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. If you cancel the DCA program, your remaining Contract Value in the DCA program will be allocated to the Subaccounts according to your allocation instructions. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify this program at any time. If you have chosen DCA from one of the Subaccounts, only the amount allocated to that DCA program will be transferred. Investment gain, if any, will remain in that Subaccount unless you reallocate it to one of the other Subaccounts. If you are enrolled in automatic rebalancing, this amount may be automatically rebalanced based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of rebalancing. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.
Automatic Withdrawal Service. The automatic withdrawal service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable Interest Adjustments. See Fixed Side of the Contract – Interest Adjustment. Withdrawals under AWS will be noted on your quarterly statement. AWS is also available for amounts allocated to the fixed account, if applicable.
Portfolio Rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount. The rebalancing may take place monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually. Rebalancing events will be noted on your quarterly statement. The fixed account is not available for portfolio rebalancing.
Only one of the two additional services (DCA and portfolio rebalancing) may be used at one time. For example, you cannot have DCA and portfolio rebalancing running simultaneously. We reserve the right to discontinue any or all of these administrative services at any time.
Fees Associated with Fee-Based Financial Plans. You have purchased this Contract as part of a Fee-Based Financial Plan whereby an investment firm or financial professional offers investment advice for a fee. The fee for this advice is set by your advisor, and is covered in a separate agreement between you and your advisor. Lincoln has not made any independent review of your financial professional. You may provide authorization to your advisory fees paid to your financial professional’s investment firm from your Contract Value (“Advisory Fee Withdrawal”), if certain conditions apply.
Partial withdrawals to pay the fee may be taken automatically by enrolling in an AWS designated specifically for this purpose. Withdrawals are available in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual frequencies. You may enroll in this service by completing the appropriate election form that is available from your advisor. Additionally, you may authorize your advisor to set up or change your AWS program, or to take one-time withdrawals to pay for the advisory fee. Once you have elected this service, it will continue until you instruct us in writing to terminate it. Withdrawals under this AWS option will be noted on your quarterly statement as an Advisory Fee Withdrawal. This AWS service may not be available through all broker-dealers.
Advisory Fee Withdrawals may not impact benefits and values under a Death Benefit or Living Benefit Rider if certain criteria are met. See the Death Benefit and Living Benefit Rider section of this prospectus for more information on how withdrawals affect these benefits. This Advisory Fee Withdrawal treatment may not be available in all states. Advisory Fee Withdrawals will not be treated as distribution for federal tax purposes if certain conditions are met. See Federal Tax Matters – Payment of Investment Advisory Fees for more information.
Living Benefit Riders
The Living Benefit Riders described in this section provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth below. There are differences between the riders in the features provided, income rates, investment options, charge rates, and charge structure. Additionally, the age at which you may begin receiving a benefit from your rider may vary between riders. In addition, the purchase of one rider may impact the availability of another rider. Not all riders will be available at all times. Before you elect a rider, or terminate your existing rider to elect a new rider, you should carefully review the terms and conditions of each rider. Riders elected at contract issue will be effective on the Contract’s effective date. Riders elected after the Contract is issued will be effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us. You cannot elect more than one Living Benefit Rider or payout option offered in your Contract at any one time.
The benefits and features of the optional Living Benefit Riders are separate and distinct from the downside protection strategies that may be employed by the funds offered under the Contract. The riders do not guarantee the investment results of the funds.
There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of a rider available to new purchasers.
Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or of those riders. If you are not certain how an Excess Withdrawal will reduce your future guaranteed amounts, you should contact either the Home Office or your financial professional prior to requesting a withdrawal to find out what impact, if any, the Excess Withdrawal will have on any guarantees under the Living Benefit Rider.
If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In
30
addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements and Appendix C – Discontinued Living Benefit Riders for more information.
From time to time, we relax our rules that apply to dropping certain riders and subsequently adding certain new ones. For example, we may waive the waiting period and instead permit you to add a new rider immediately after dropping your old one. We may also let you drop a rider before it has been in effect for the required holding period. When you drop your old rider, your old rider and charge will be terminated.
If you drop a rider for a new one during a period of time when we do not have an offer in place or have a different offer, you will not be eligible for any future offers related to the rider you previously dropped, even if such future offer would have included a greater or different benefit.
Rate Sheets
The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages are declared in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the current percentages and the date by which your rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those percentages. The percentages may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet.
The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be provided to you when you elect a rider. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet information by contracting your financial professional or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. The percentages from previous effective periods are included in Appendix E to this prospectus.
If the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages that we are currently offering on the day the Contract and/or rider is issued are higher than the rates we were offering on the date you signed your rider election form, you will receive the higher set of rates. If any rates have decreased when we compare the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages that we are offering on the day you signed your rider election form to the set of rates that we are offering on the day your Contract and/or rider is issued, your Contract and/or rider will be issued with the set of rates that were in effect on the day you signed your rider election form.
Advisory Fee Withdrawals
You may elect to take withdrawals from your Contract to pay the advisory fees associated with your Fee-Based Financial Plan (Advisory Fee Withdrawals). This Advisory Fee Withdrawal treatment may not be available in all states. You may take Advisory Fee Withdrawals of up to 1.25% annually without negatively impacting your Living Benefit Rider. Advisory Fee Withdrawals may not be available in all states, and certain advisory firms may not allow withdrawals to pay advisory fees, so please check with your financial professional.
Cumulative annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not reduce your guarantees or be considered a withdrawal under your Living Benefit Rider. We reserve the right to increase or decrease this percentage at any time. For cumulative annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will reduce your guarantees and will be treated as a withdrawal under your Living Benefit Rider. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of each Advisory Fee Withdrawal. Please refer to each rider section below to determine how Advisory Fee Withdrawals impact each rider.
i4LIFE® Advantage
i4LIFE® Advantage (the Variable Annuity Payout Option rider in your Contract) is an optional Annuity Payout rider you may purchase at an additional cost and is separate and distinct from other Annuity Payout options offered under your Contract and described later in this prospectus. You may also purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit for an additional charge. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge.
i4LIFE® Advantage provides variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for life subject to certain conditions. The Guaranteed Income Benefit provides a minimum payout floor for those Regular Income Payments. These payments are made during two time periods: an Access Period and a Lifetime Income Period, which are discussed in further detail below. If your Account Value is reduced to zero (except by additional withdrawals as described below), these payments will continue for your life (or the lives of you and your Secondary Life under the joint life option) during the Lifetime Income Period. i4LIFE® Advantage is different from other Annuity Payout options provided by Lincoln because with i4LIFE® Advantage, you have the ability to make additional withdrawals or surrender the Contract during the Access Period. If your Account Value is reduced to zero due to any additional withdrawals (except for Advisory Fee Withdrawals that are within the Advisory Fee Withdrawal percentage), i4LIFE® Advantage will end and your Contract will terminate.
31
You may also purchase the optional Guaranteed Income Benefit, for an additional charge, which provides a minimum payout floor for your Regular Income Payments. You choose when you want to receive your first Regular Income Payment and the frequency with which you will receive Regular Income Payments. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is described in further detail below.
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you must choose the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if applicable). The Annuitant and Secondary Life may not be changed after i4LIFE® Advantage is elected. For qualified contracts, the Secondary Life must be the spouse. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits regarding the impact of a change to the Annuitant prior to the i4LIFE® Advantage election.
If i4LIFE® Advantage is selected, the applicable transfer provisions among Subaccounts and the fixed account will continue to be those specified in your annuity contract for transfers on or before the Annuity Commencement Date. However, once i4LIFE® Advantage begins, any automatic withdrawal service will terminate (except an AWS service designated specifically for the purpose of Advisory Fee Withdrawals). See The Contracts – Transfers on or Before the Annuity Commencement Date.
Additional Purchase Payments may be made during the Access Period for an IRA annuity contract, unless Guaranteed Income Benefit has been elected. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit option has been elected on an IRA contract, additional Purchase Payments may be made until the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated. Additional Purchase Payments will not be accepted after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for a nonqualified annuity contract.
Availability. i4LIFE® Advantage is available for contracts with a Contract Value of at least $50,000 and may be elected at the time of annuity application or at any time before any other Annuity Payout option under this Contract is elected by sending a completed i4LIFE® Advantage election form to our Home Office. You may elect any available version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit when you elect i4LIFE® Advantage or during the Access Period, if still available for election, subject to the terms and conditions at that time. You may choose not to purchase the Guaranteed Income Benefit at the time you purchase i4LIFE® Advantage by indicating that you do not want the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit on the election form. Additionally, certain Living Benefit Riders allow a transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions below. If you intend to use the Income Base or the Guaranteed Amount from a previously elected Living Benefit Rider (“Prior Rider”) to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you must elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage.
i4LIFE® Advantage and the Guaranteed Income Benefit are available on nonqualified annuities, IRAs and Roth IRAs (check with your financial professional regarding availability in the SEP market). i4LIFE® Advantage for IRA contracts is only available if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, are age 59½ or older at the time the option is elected. i4LIFE® Advantage with Guaranteed Income Benefit must be elected by age 80 on IRA contracts or age 95 on nonqualified contracts. Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions.
Access Period. The Access Period begins on the Periodic Income Commencement Date and is a defined period of time during which we pay variable, periodic Regular Income Payments and provide a Death Benefit. During this period, you may surrender the Contract and make withdrawals from your Account Value (defined below). The Lifetime Income Period begins immediately at the end of the Access Period and the remaining Account Value is used to make Regular Income Payments for the rest of your life (or the Secondary Life if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer be able to make withdrawals, including Advisory Fee Withdrawals, or surrenders or receive a Death Benefit. If your Account Value is reduced to zero because of Regular Income Payments or market loss, your Access Period ends.
The minimum and maximum Access Periods are established at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage and/or the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The current Access Period requirements are outlined in the following chart: 
 
Minimum Access Period
Maximum Access Period
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income
Benefit) for new elections on and after November 20,
2023
10 years
The length of time between
your age and age 115 for
nonqualified contracts; age
100 for qualified contracts
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income
Benefit) for elections prior to November 20, 2023
5 years
The length of time between
your age and age 115 for
nonqualified contracts; age
100 for qualified contracts
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit
Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 90
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age
(nearest birthday) and age 100
To age 115 for nonqualified
contracts; to age 100 for
qualified contracts
 
32
The minimum Access Period requirements may vary if you transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit from another rider. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions below.
Generally, shorter Access Periods will produce a higher initial Regular Income Payment than longer Access Periods. At any time during the Access Period, you may extend or shorten the length of the Access Period subject to Home Office approval. Additional restrictions may apply if you are under age 59½ when you request a change to the Access Period. Currently, if you extend the Access Period, it must be extended at least 5 years. If you change the Access Period, subsequent Regular Income Payments will be adjusted accordingly, and the Account Value remaining at the end of the new Access Period will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life. If you shorten the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will terminate. Currently, changes to the Access Period can only be made on Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversaries.
Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. We may reduce or terminate the Access Period for IRA i4LIFE® Advantage contracts in order to keep the Regular Income Payments in compliance with IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. The minimum Access Period requirements for Guaranteed Income Benefits are longer than the requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit. If we lower the Access Period to comply with IRC provisions, there is no impact to the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
Account Value. The initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date will equal the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments made as well as any withdrawals taken. You will have access to your Account Value during the Access Period. After the Access Period ends, the remaining Account Value will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life and the Account Value will be reduced to zero.
Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. i4LIFE® Advantage provides for variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for as long as an Annuitant (or Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you will make several choices that will impact the amount of your Regular Income Payments:
•
the date you will receive the initial Regular Income Payment;
•
the date the Access Period ends;
•
the frequency of the payments (monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually);
•
the frequency the payment is recalculated;
•
the assumed investment return (AIR); and
•
when the Lifetime Income Period begins.
Some of the choices will not be available if you elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
If you do not choose a payment frequency, the default is a monthly payment frequency. In most states, you may also elect to have Regular Income Payments from nonqualified contracts recalculated only once each year rather than recalculated at the time of each payment. This results in level Regular Income Payments between recalculation dates. Qualified contracts are only recalculated once per year, on December 31st (if not a Valuation Date, then on the first Valuation Date of the calendar year).
AIR rates of 3% or 4% may be available. For i4LIFE® Advantage elections prior to November 20, 2023, AIR rates of 5% and 6% were also available, but certain states had limited the availability of 5% and 6% AIR. The higher the AIR you choose, the higher your initial Regular Income Payment will be and the higher the return must be to increase subsequent Regular Income Payments. A 3% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections made prior to February 19, 2019; a 4% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under all other versions of Guaranteed Income Benefit and Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections made on and after February 19, 2019.
Regular Income Payments must begin within one year of the date you elect i4LIFE® Advantage and will continue until the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable.
Regular Income Payments are not subject to any applicable Interest Adjustments. See Charges and Other Deductions. For information regarding income tax consequences of Regular Income Payments, see Federal Tax Matters.
The initial Regular Income Payment is calculated from the Account Value on a date no more than 14 days prior to the date you select to begin receiving Regular Income Payments. This calculation date is called the Periodic Income Commencement Date, and is the same date the Access Period begins. The amount of the initial Regular Income Payment is determined by dividing the Contract Value (or Purchase Payment if elected at contract issue), less applicable premium taxes by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor. The annuity factor is based upon:
•
the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable;
•
the length of the Access Period selected;
•
the frequency of the Regular Income Payments;
33
•
the AIR selected; and
•
the Individual Annuity Mortality table.
The annuity factor used to determine the Regular Income Payments reflects the fact that, during the Access Period, you have the ability to withdraw the entire Account Value and that a Death Benefit Account Value will be paid to your Beneficiary upon your death. These benefits during the Access Period result in a slightly lower Regular Income Payment, during both the Access Period and the Lifetime Income Period, than would be payable if this access was not permitted and no lump-sum Death Benefit was payable. (The Contractowner must elect an Access Period of no less than the minimum Access Period which is currently set at 10 years.) The annuity factor also reflects the requirement that there be sufficient Account Value at the end of the Access Period to continue your Regular Income Payments for the remainder of your life (and/or the Secondary Life if applicable), during the Lifetime Income Period, with no further access or Death Benefit.
The amount of your Regular Income Payment will be impacted by the length of the Access Period you have chosen. For example, if a 70-year old male makes a $100,000 initial Purchase Payment, elects monthly payments, a 4% AIR, and a 20-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $504.96 per month ($6,059.60 annually). Using the same assumptions, but with a 30-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $448.41 per month ($5,380.90 annually).
The Account Value will vary with the actual net investment return of the Subaccounts selected and the interest credited on the fixed account, which then determines the subsequent Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. Each subsequent Regular Income Payment (unless the levelized option is selected) is determined by dividing the Account Value on the applicable Valuation Date by 1,000 and multiplying this result by an annuity factor revised to reflect the declining length of the Access Period. As a result of this calculation, the actual net returns in the Account Value are measured against the AIR to determine subsequent Regular Income Payments. If the actual net investment return (annualized) for the Contract exceeds the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will increase at a rate approximately equal to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment return for the Contract is less than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease. For example, if net investment return is 3% higher (annualized) than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment for the next year will increase by approximately 3%. Conversely, if actual net investment return is 3% lower than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease by approximately 3%.
Withdrawals made during the Access Period will also reduce the Account Value that is available for Regular Income Payments, and subsequent Regular Income Payments will be recalculated and could be increased or reduced, based on the Account Value following the withdrawal.
For a joint life option, if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life dies during the Access Period, Regular Income Payments will be recalculated using a revised annuity factor based on the single surviving life, if doing so provides a higher Regular Income Payment. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life spouse must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first spouse’s death.
For nonqualified contracts, if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit (if any) will terminate and the annuity factor will be revised for a non-life contingent Regular Income Payment and Regular Income Payments will continue until the Account Value is fully paid out and the Access Period ends. For qualified contracts, if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage (and any Guaranteed Income Benefit) will terminate.
Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. The Lifetime Income Period begins at the end of the Access Period if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life is living. Your earlier elections regarding the frequency of Regular Income Payments, AIR and the frequency of the recalculation do not change. The initial Regular Income Payment during the Lifetime Income Period is determined by dividing the Account Value on the last Valuation Date of the Access Period by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor revised to reflect that the Access Period has ended. The annuity factor is based upon:
•
the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if living);
•
the frequency of the Regular Income Payments;
•
the AIR selected; and
•
the Individual Annuity Mortality table.
The impact of the length of the Access Period and any withdrawals made during the Access Period will continue to be reflected in the Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. To determine subsequent Regular Income Payments, the Contract is credited with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the initial Regular Income Payment (during the Lifetime Income Period) divided by the Annuity Unit value (by Subaccount). Subsequent Regular Income Payments are determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units per Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value. Your Regular Income Payments will vary based on the value of your Annuity Units. If your Regular Income Payments are adjusted on an annual basis, the total of the annual payment is transferred to Lincoln Life's general account to be paid out based on the payment mode you selected. Your payment(s) will not be affected by market performance during that year. Your Regular Income Payment(s) for the following year will be recalculated at the beginning of the following year based on the current value of the Annuity Units.
34
Regular Income Payments will continue for as long as the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable, is living, and will continue to be adjusted for investment performance of the Subaccounts your Annuity Units are invested in (and the fixed account if applicable). Regular Income Payments vary with investment performance.
During the Lifetime Income Period, there is no longer an Account Value; therefore, no withdrawals are available and no Death Benefit is payable. In addition, transfers are not allowed from a fixed annuity payment to a variable annuity payment.
i4LIFE® Advantage Credit. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage on and after November 20, 2023 (subject to state approval) you will receive a quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit if you select a minimum Access Period that is the longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 85, and you maintain a minimum threshold value. The threshold values and applicable credit percentages are outlined in the chart below. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is not applied to Contracts with the Guaranteed Income Benefit.
If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the contract issue date. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the first Regular Income Payment. Thereafter, it will apply every three months, if all conditions are met. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end at the end of the Access Period. If the Contract is terminated for any reason, including death, no further i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be paid. Proportionate credits will not be applied.
The amount of the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is calculated on each quarterly Valuation Date by multiplying:
•
the variable Account Value on that date; by
•
the quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit percentage (determined by the applicable tier). 
 
Tier 1
Tier 2
Minimum Threshold Value
$500,000
$1,000,000
Credit Percentage (Annually)
0.10%
0.20%
Credit Percentage (Quarterly)
0.025%
0.050%
If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the initial Purchase Payment. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the Account Value on the first Regular Income Payment date. The threshold value will be increased by additional Purchase Payments (qualified contracts only), which may cause your Contract to move into a Tier 1 threshold, or to move from a Tier 1 to a Tier 2 threshold and receive the applicable credit. Conversely, additional withdrawals (exclusive of i4LIFE® Advantage payments, required minimum distributions, and Advisory Fee Withdrawals that do not exceed the Advisory Fee Withdrawal percentage) will reduce your threshold value on a dollar-for-dollar basis, potentially dropping a Tier 2 contract to a Tier 1 contract, or to become ineligible for the credit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will not be applied when the minimum threshold value is not met at the time of the quarterly evaluation.
If you shorten the Access Period so that it no longer meets the stated requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end. However, if you subsequently extend the Access Period to meet the requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will resume if the minimum threshold value requirement is met.
The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be allocated to the Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount on the quarterly Valuation Date. There is no additional charge to receive this i4LIFE® Advantage Credit, and in no case will the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit be less than zero. The amount of any i4LIFE® Advantage Credit received will be noted on your quarterly statement. Confirmation statements for each individual transaction will not be issued. i4LIFE® Advantage Credits are not considered Purchase Payments.
Guaranteed Income Benefit
The Guaranteed Income Benefit is an optional benefit that is available for an additional charge. It provides that your Regular Income Payments will never be less than a minimum payout floor, regardless of the actual investment performance of your Contract.
If you previously elected any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements for more information. You will be subject to those Investment Requirements for the entire time you own the rider. Failure to comply with the Investment Requirements will result in the termination of the rider.
There is no guarantee that any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be available to elect in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue this option at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit available to new purchasers or may create different versions for use with various Living Benefit Riders. However, certain Living Benefit Riders may guarantee a Contractowner the right to transition from that Prior Rider to a version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit that may no longer be offered. The transition rules are set forth below.
In certain states the total annual Guaranteed Income Benefit that would otherwise be payable may be subject to a maximum amount. Please refer to your Contract or contact your registered representative for more information.
35
Guaranteed Income Benefit Amount. For Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk), and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), the Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on A, or if transitioning from a Prior Rider, the greater of A and B:
A.
the Account Value immediately prior to electing Guaranteed Income Benefit; or
B.
the Protected Income Base under the Prior Rider reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up (or inception date if no step-ups have occurred).
The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of the above, based on your age (or the age of the younger life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected or, if transitioning from a Prior Rider, the date of the first Regular Income Payment.
The following is an example of how the Guaranteed Amount or the Protected Income Base from another Living Benefit Rider may be used to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. The example assumes that a 4.5% Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage is used to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. 
Account Value (equals Contract Value on date i4LIFE® Advantage
Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected)
$100,000
 
Guaranteed Amount/Protected Income Base on date i4LIFE®
Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected:
$140,000
 
Initial Regular Income Payment
$5,411
 
Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4.5% x $140,000 Guaranteed
Amount/Protected Income Base which is greater than $100,000
Account Value)
$6,300
 
Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages and Age-Bands. The specific percentages and applicable age-bands for calculating the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit are discussed below.
The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the percentages may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. This percentage structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior percentages, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages will not change as a result.
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections, including transitions from a Prior Rider, are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage, its effective period, and the date by which your rider election form must be signed and dated for a Contract to be issued with that percentage. The percentages may change periodically and may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet.
The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in the Rate Sheet can be superseded. The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in any subsequent Rate Sheet may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet. Your rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on after the effective date of the Rate Sheet in order to get the percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-877-534-8255. Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). The specified percentages and the corresponding age-bands for calculating the Guaranteed Income Benefit under Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) are outlined in an Appendix to this prospectus. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) is only available for purchase if you are guaranteed the right to elect a prior version under a Prior Rider.
Guaranteed Income Benefit General Provisions
For all versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit, if the amount of your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment has fallen below the Guaranteed Income Benefit, because of poor investment results, a payment equal to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is the minimum payment you will receive. If the market performance in your Contract is sufficient to provide Regular Income Payments at a level that exceeds the Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Guaranteed Income Benefit will never come into effect. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit is paid, it will be paid with the same frequency as your Regular Income Payment. If your Regular Income Payment is less than the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will reduce the Account Value by the Regular Income Payment plus an additional amount equal to the difference between your Regular Income Payment and the Guaranteed Income Benefit (in other words,
36
Guaranteed Income Benefit payments reduce the Account Value by the entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment). This payment will be made from the variable Subaccounts and the fixed account proportionately, according to your investment allocations.
If your Account Value reaches zero as a result of payments to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will continue to pay you an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. If your Account Value reaches zero, your Access Period will end and your Lifetime Income Period will begin. Additional amounts withdrawn from the Account Value to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit may terminate your Access Period earlier than originally scheduled, and will reduce your Death Benefit. If your Account Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits. After the Access Period ends, we will continue to pay the Guaranteed Income Benefit for as long as the Annuitant (or the Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.
The following example illustrates how poor investment performance, which results in a Guaranteed Income Benefit payment, affects the i4LIFE® Account Value: 
i4LIFE® Account Value before market decline
$135,000
i4LIFE® Account Value after market decline
$100,000
Monthly Guaranteed Income Benefit
$810
Monthly Regular Income Payment after market decline
$769
Account Value after market decline and Guaranteed Income Benefit
payment
$99,190
The Contractowner receives an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted from the Account Value.
Guaranteed Income Benefit Step-ups. The Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step up every year to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. For nonqualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date on or after each Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary starting on the first Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. For qualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date of the first periodic income payment of each calendar year.
The following example illustrates how the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated for a Contractowner with a nonqualified contract, and how a step-up would increase the Guaranteed Income Benefit in a subsequent year. The example assumes a 4% Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit, and that the Account Value has increased due to positive investment returns resulting in a higher recalculated Regular Income Payment. See Living Benefit Riders – i4LIFE® Advantage-Regular Income Payments during the Access Period for a discussion of recalculation of the Regular Income Payment. 
8/1/2024 Amount of initial Regular Income Payment
$4,801
8/1/2024 Account Value at election of Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
$100,000
8/1/2024 Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4% x $100,000 Account Value)
$4,000
8/1/2025 Recalculated Regular Income Payment
$6,000
8/1/2025 Guaranteed Income Benefit after step-up (75% of $6,000)
$4,500
The Guaranteed Income Benefit was increased to 75% of the recalculated Regular Income Payment.
i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits
When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, the Death Benefit option that you previously elected will become the Death Benefit election under i4LIFE® Advantage, unless you elect a less expensive Death Benefit option. If you had previously elected EEB Death Benefit, you must elect a new Death Benefit. Existing Contractowners with the Account Value Death Benefit, who elect i4LIFE® Advantage must choose the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The amount paid under the new Death Benefit may be less than the amount that would have been paid under the Death Benefit provided before i4LIFE® Advantage began (if premium taxes have been deducted from the Contract Value).
i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the death claim. You may not change this Death Benefit once it is elected.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the greater of:
•
the Account Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
•
the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:
37
•
Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and
•
all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.
References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election. Withdrawals that were not treated as Excess Withdrawals under a Prior Rider will reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the withdrawal.
In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals and premium taxes, if any.
Subject to state approval, annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not be considered a withdrawal under your Death Benefit calculation of the sum of all Purchase Payments or highest Contract Value. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, but the value of your Death Benefit will not be negatively impacted. For Annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will be treated as a withdrawal under this Death Benefit and reduce your guarantees.
The following example demonstrates the impact of a proportionate withdrawal on your Death Benefit: 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit
$200,000
 
Regular Income Payment
$25,000
 
Account Value at the time of additional withdrawal
$150,000
 
Additional withdrawal
$15,000
($15,000/$150,000=10% withdrawal)
 
 
Death Benefit Value after Regular Income Payment = $200,000 - $25,000 = $175,000
Reduction in Death Benefit value for withdrawal = $175,000 x 10% = $17,500
Death Benefit Value after additional withdrawal = $175,000 - $17,500 = $157,500
The Regular Income Payment reduced the Death Benefit by $25,000 and the additional withdrawal caused a 10% reduction in the Death Benefit, the same percentage that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value.
During the Access Period, contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at our Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit.
i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB. The i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB is only available during the Access Period and is the greatest of:
•
the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the claim; or
•
the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:
•
Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and
•
all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.
References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election; or
•
the highest Account Value or Contract Value on any contract anniversary date (including the inception date of the Contract) after the EGMDB is effective (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased and prior to the date of death. The highest Account Value or Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and is decreased by Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and all other withdrawals subsequent to the anniversary date on which the highest Account Value or Contract Value is obtained. Regular Income Payments, including Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals are deducted in the same proportion that Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.
38
Subject to state approval, annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not be considered a withdrawal under your Death Benefit calculation of the sum of all Purchase Payments or highest Contract Value. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, but the value of your Death Benefit will not be negatively impacted. For Annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will be treated as a withdrawal under this Death Benefit and reduce your guarantees.
When determining the highest anniversary value, if you elected the EGMDB (or more expensive Death Benefit option) in the base contract and this Death Benefit was in effect when you purchased i4LIFE® Advantage, we will look at the Contract Value before i4LIFE® Advantage and the Account Value after the i4LIFE® Advantage election to determine the highest anniversary value. We will look at such values on the contract annual anniversary date.
In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals and premium taxes, if any.
Contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal or the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at the Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB.
General Death Benefit Provisions. These Death Benefit options are only available during the Access Period and will terminate when the Account Value equals zero, because the Access Period terminates.
If there is a change in the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant during the life of the Contract, for any reason other than death, the only Death Benefit payable for the new person will be the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life spouse must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first spouse’s death.
For nonqualified contracts, upon the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant, the Contractowner (or Beneficiary) may elect to terminate the Contract and receive full payment of the Death Benefit or may elect to continue the Contract and receive Regular Income Payments. Upon the death of the Secondary Life, who is not also an owner, only the surrender value is paid.
If you are the owner of an IRA annuity contract, and there is no Secondary Life, and you die during the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate. A spouse Beneficiary may start a new i4LIFE® Advantage program.
If a death occurs during the Access Period, the value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of all the following:
1.
an original certified death certificate or any other proof of death satisfactory to us; and
2.
written authorization for payment; and
3.
all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).
Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.
Upon notification to us of the death, Regular Income Payments may be suspended until the death claim is approved by us. Upon approval, a lump sum payment for the value of any suspended payments will be made as of the date the death claim is approved, and Regular Income Payments will continue, if applicable. The excess, if any, of the Death Benefit over the Account Value will be credited into the Contract at that time.
If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions
Certain Living Benefit Riders (“Prior Rider”) allow you to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. 
If your Prior Rider is...
you will transition to…
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)
Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
39
  
The following discussion applies to all of these transitions.
If you have elected one of the Prior Riders listed above, you are guaranteed the right to transition to the applicable version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. You are also guaranteed that the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage and Access Period requirements will be at least as favorable as those in effect at the time you purchased your Prior Rider. The Investment Requirements under your Prior Rider continue to apply after you transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements for a description of these investment requirements. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of the greater of your Account Value or Protected Income Base or Guaranteed Amount, as applicable, based on your age (or the younger life under a joint life option) at the time of the first Regular Income Payment.
Your decision to transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date, and by the maximum age to elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, which is age 95 for nonqualified contracts and age 80 for qualified contracts. Purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) who have waited until after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary may elect the appropriate version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit until age 99 for nonqualified contracts and age 85 for qualified contracts.
If you have the single life option under your Prior Rider, you must transition to the single life option under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit; joint life option must transition to the joint life option. The minimum Access Period requirements may vary based on which Prior Rider you elected, and are specifically listed in the chart below.
While i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect, the Contractowner cannot change the payment mode elected or decrease the length of the Access Period.
Different minimum Access Period requirements may apply if you use the greater of the Account Value or Protected Income Base (less amounts paid since the last automatic step-up) under a Prior Rider to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit as set forth below: 
Minimum Access Period
 
Elections of i4LIFE® Advantage prior
to the 5th Benefit Year anniversary
Elections of i4LIFE® Advantage on and
after the 5th Benefit Year anniversary
Purchasers of:
•Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage
2.0 on or after April 2, 2012
Longer of 20 years or the difference
between your age and age 90
Longer of 20 years or the difference
between your age and age 90
Purchasers of:
•4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)
•Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage
2.0 prior to April 2, 2012
Longer of 20 years or the difference
between your age and age 90
Longer of 15 years or the difference
between your age and age 85
 
A 3% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments for all transitions to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, and for transitions to i4LIFE Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) if your Prior Rider was purchased on or after May 18, 2020. A 4% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments for all other transitions to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) if your Prior Rider was purchased prior to May 18, 2020.
When deciding whether to transition from your Prior Rider to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you should consider that depending on your age (and the age of your Secondary Life under the joint life option) and the selected length of the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage may provide a higher payout than the Guaranteed Annual Income amounts from your Prior Rider. You should consider electing i4LIFE® Advantage when you are ready to immediately start receiving i4LIFE® Advantage payments, whereas with your Prior Rider, you may defer taking withdrawals until a later date. Payments from a nonqualified contract that a person receives under the i4LIFE® Advantage rider are treated as “amounts received as an annuity” under section 72 of the Internal Revenue Code because the payments occur after the annuity starting date. These payments are subject to an “exclusion ratio” as provided in section 72(b) of the Code, which means a portion of each Annuity Payout is treated as income (taxable at ordinary income rates), and the remainder is treated as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments. In contrast, withdrawals under your Prior Rider are not treated as amounts received as an annuity because they occur prior to the annuity starting date. As a result, such withdrawals are treated first as a return of any existing gain in the Contract (which is the measure of the extent to which the Contract Value exceeds Purchase Payments), and then as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments.
40
i4LIFE® Advantage General Provisions
Withdrawals. You may request a withdrawal at any time during the Access Period. We reduce the Account Value by the amount of the withdrawal, and all subsequent Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, if applicable, will be recalculated. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is reduced proportionately. Withdrawals may have tax consequences. See Federal Tax Matters. The Interest Adjustment may apply.
If you purchased your Contract as part of a Fee-Based Financial Plan, you may take Advisory Fee Withdrawals of up to 1.25% of your Contract Value annually. These withdrawals will reduce the Account Value but will not trigger a recalculation. Certain states, broker-dealers, or advisory firms may not allow withdrawals to pay the fees associated with your advisory fees so please check with your registered representative. The portion of any Advisory Fee Withdrawal in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value will reduce the Account Value and will also trigger a recalculation.
The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Guaranteed Income Benefit payments: 
i4LIFE® Regular Income Payment before additional withdrawal
$1,200
 
Guaranteed Income Benefit before additional withdrawal
$900
 
Account Value at time of additional withdrawal
$150,000
 
Additional withdrawal
$15,000
(a 10% withdrawal)
 
 
Reduction in Guaranteed Income Benefit for additional withdrawal = $900 x 10% = $90
Guaranteed Income Benefit after additional withdrawal = $900 - $90 = $810
Surrender. At any time during the Access Period, you may surrender the Contract by withdrawing the surrender value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contract terminates and no further Regular Income Payments will be made. The Interest Adjustment may apply.
Termination. You may terminate i4LIFE® Advantage prior to the end of the Access Period by notifying us in writing. The termination will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive the notice.
For IRA annuity contracts, upon termination, the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end and your base contract expense will resume. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.
For nonqualified contracts, your i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefit will terminate, and the Account Value Death Benefit will be in effect. The i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end, and the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit will begin. All earnings in the Contract will be subject to income taxation in the year of the termination. A termination will be treated as a surrender for income tax purposes. If you choose to keep your underlying contract in force, this transaction will be treated as a repurchase for purposes of calculating future income taxes. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.
i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate due to any of the following events:
•
the death of the Annuitant (or the later of the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life if a joint payout was elected); or
•
a Contractowner requested a decrease in the Access Period or a change to the Regular Income Payment frequency; or
•
upon written notice from the Contractowner to us; or
•
assignment of the Contract; or
•
failure to comply with Investment Requirements.
A termination of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit due to a decrease in the Access Period, a change in the Regular Income Payment frequency, or upon written notice from the Contractowner will be effective as of the Valuation Date on the next Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. Termination will be only for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit and not the i4LIFE® Advantage election, unless otherwise specified. However, if you used the greater of the Account Value, Protected Income Base, or Guaranteed Amount under a previously held Living Benefit Rider to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, any termination of the Guaranteed Income Benefit will also result in a termination of the i4LIFE® Advantage election. If you terminate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit you may be able to re-elect it, if available, after one year. The election will be treated as a new purchase, subject to the terms and charges in effect at the time of election and the i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment will be recalculated. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on the Account Value at the time of the election.
41
Annuity Payouts
When you apply for a Contract, you may select any Annuity Commencement Date permitted by law, which is usually on or before the Annuitant's 99th birthday. As an alternative, Contractowners with Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may elect to annuitize their Guaranteed Amount under the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option. Contractowners with Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may elect to annuitize their Protected Income Base under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option.
The Contract provides optional forms of payouts of annuities (annuity options), each of which is payable on a variable basis, a fixed basis or a combination of both as you specify. The Contract provides that all or part of the Contract Value may be used to purchase an Annuity Payout option. The minimum rates used to purchase any of the annuity options discussed below are shown in the Contract.
You may elect Annuity Payouts in monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual installments. If the payouts from any Subaccount would be or become less than $50, we have the right to reduce their frequency until the payouts are at least $50 each. Following are explanations of the annuity options available. Advisory Fee Withdrawals are not allowed after your Contract is annuitized or during the Lifetime Income Period under i4LIFE® Advantage.
Annuity Options
The annuity options outlined below do not apply to Contractowners who have elected i4LIFE® Advantage, the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option or the Protected Annual Income Payout Option.
Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant and ends with the last payout before the death of the Annuitant. This option offers the highest periodic payout since there is no guarantee of a minimum number of payouts or provision for a Death Benefit for Beneficiaries. However, there is the risk under this option that the recipient would receive no payouts if the Annuitant dies before the date set for the first payout; only one payout if death occurs before the second scheduled payout, and so on. The Annuitant must be under age 81 to elect this option.
Life Annuity with Payouts Guaranteed for Designated Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and then continues throughout the lifetime of the Annuitant. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.
Joint Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. However, under a joint life annuity, if both Annuitants die before the date set for the first payout, no payouts will be made. Only one payment would be made if both deaths occur before the second scheduled payout, and so on.
Joint Life Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and continues during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.
Joint Life and Two Thirds to Survivor Annuity. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive.
Joint Life and Two-Thirds Survivor Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two-thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive. This option further provides that should one or both of the Annuitants die during the elected guaranteed period, usually 10 or 20 years, full benefit payment will continue for the rest of the guaranteed period.
Life Annuity with Unit Refund. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death a payout will be made of the value of the number of Annuity Units (see Variable Annuity Payouts) equal to the excess, if any, of:
•
the total amount applied under this option divided by the Annuity Unit value for the date payouts begin, minus
•
the Annuity Units represented by each payout to the Annuitant multiplied by the number of payouts paid before death.
The value of the number of Annuity Units is computed on the date the death claim is approved for payment by the Home Office.
Life Annuity with Cash Refund. Fixed annuity benefit payments that will be made for the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death, should (a) the total dollar amount applied to purchase this option be greater than (b) the fixed annuity benefit payment multiplied by the number of annuity benefit payments paid prior to death, then a refund payment equal to the dollar amount of (a) minus (b) will be made.
Under the annuity options listed above, you may not make withdrawals. Other options, with or without withdrawal features, may be made available by us. You may pre-select an Annuity Payout option as a method of paying the Death Benefit to a Beneficiary. If you do, the Beneficiary cannot change this payout option. You may change or revoke in writing to our Home Office, any such selection, unless such selection was made irrevocable. If you have not already chosen an Annuity Payout option, the Beneficiary may choose
42
any Annuity Payout option. At death, options are only available to the extent they are consistent with the requirements of the Contract as well as Sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) of the tax code, if applicable.
General Information
Any previously selected Death Benefit in effect before the Annuity Commencement Date will no longer be available on and after the Annuity Commencement Date. You may change the Annuity Commencement Date, change the annuity option or change the allocation of the investment among Subaccounts up to 30 days before the scheduled Annuity Commencement Date, upon written notice to the Home Office. You must give us at least 30 days’ notice before the date on which you want payouts to begin. We may require proof of age, sex, or survival of any payee upon whose age, sex, or survival payments depend.
Unless you select another option, the Contract automatically provides for a life annuity with Annuity Payouts guaranteed for 10 years (on a fixed, variable or combination fixed and variable basis, in proportion to the account allocations at the time of annuitization) except when a joint life payout is required by law. Under any option providing for guaranteed period payouts, the number of payouts which remain unpaid at the date of the Annuitant’s death (or surviving Annuitant’s death in case of joint life Annuity) will be paid to you or your Beneficiary as payouts become due after we are in receipt of:
•
An original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us;
•
written authorization for payment; and
•
all claim forms, fully completed.
Variable Annuity Payouts
Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined using:
•
the Contract Value on the Annuity Commencement Date, less applicable premium taxes;
•
the annuity tables contained in the Contract;
•
the annuity option selected; and
•
the investment performance of the fund(s) selected.
To determine the amount of payouts, we make this calculation:
1.
Determine the dollar amount of the first periodic payout; then
2.
Credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the first periodic payout divided by the Annuity Unit value; and
3.
Calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.
Annuity Payouts assume an investment return of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per year, as applied to the applicable mortality table. Some of these assumed interest rates may not be available in your state; therefore, please contact the Home Office or your financial professional. You may choose your assumed interest rate at the time you elect a variable Annuity Payout on the administrative form provided by us. The higher the assumed interest rate you choose, the higher your initial annuity payment will be. The amount of each payout after the initial payout will depend upon how the underlying fund(s) perform, relative to the assumed rate. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed rate, the payment will increase at a rate proportional to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment rate is less than the assumed rate, annuity payments will decrease. The higher the assumed interest rate, the less likely future annuity payments are to increase, or the payments will increase more slowly than if a lower assumed rate was used. There is a more complete explanation of this calculation in the SAI.
Fixed Side of the Contract
Currently the fixed account is available for dollar cost averaging purposes only.
You may allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed side of the contract, if available. Allocations made to the fixed side of the contract are added to your Contract Value. Certain charges related to the Contract and the charges for the Living Benefit Riders are deducted from your Contract Value. Therefore, a portion of those charges may be deducted from the fixed account. See Charges and Other Deductions section of this prospectus for more information. Since amounts in the fixed account make up part of your Contract Value, those amounts may be used to calculate benefits under the Living Benefit Riders. See the Living Benefit Riders section in this prospectus for more information.
Purchase Payments and Contract Value allocated to the fixed side of the contract become part of our general account, and do not participate in the investment experience of the VAA. The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Department of Insurance as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed.
In reliance on certain exemptions, exclusions and rules, we have not registered interests in the general account as a security under the Securities Act of 1933 and have not registered the general account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the general account nor any interests in it are regulated under the 1933 Act or the 1940 Act. We have been advised that the staff
43
of the SEC has not made a review of the disclosures which are included in this prospectus which relate to our general account and to the fixed account under the Contract. These disclosures, however, may be subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses. This prospectus is generally intended to serve as a disclosure document only for aspects of the Contract involving the VAA, and therefore contains only selected information regarding the fixed side of the contract. Complete details regarding the fixed side of the contract are in the Contract.
We guarantee an annual effective interest rate of not less than 1.50% per year on amounts held in a fixed account. Any amount surrendered, withdrawn from or transferred out of a fixed account prior to the expiration of the Guaranteed Period is subject to the Interest Adjustment and other charges (see Interest Adjustment and Charges and Other Deductions). This may reduce your value upon surrender, withdrawal or transfer but will not reduce the amount below the value it would have had if 1.50% (or the guaranteed minimum interest rate for your Contract) interest had been credited to the fixed account. Refer to Transfers before the Annuity Commencement Date and Transfers after the Annuity Commencement Date for additional transfer restrictions from the fixed account.
ANY INTEREST IN EXCESS OF 1.50% (OR THE GUARANTEED MINIMUM INTEREST RATE STATED IN YOUR CONTRACT) WILL BE DECLARED IN ADVANCE AT OUR SOLE DISCRETION. CONTRACTOWNERS BEAR THE RISK THAT NO INTEREST IN EXCESS OF THE MINIMUM INTEREST RATE WILL BE DECLARED.
Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Please contact your financial professional for further information.
Guaranteed Periods
The fixed account is divided into separate Guaranteed Periods, which credit guaranteed interest.
You may allocate Purchase Payments to one or more Guaranteed Periods of 1 to 10 years. We may add Guaranteed Periods or discontinue accepting Purchase Payments into one or more Guaranteed Periods at any time. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment that can be allocated to a Guaranteed Period is $2,000. Each Purchase Payment allocated to the fixed account will start its own Guaranteed Period and will earn a guaranteed interest rate. The duration of the Guaranteed Period affects the guaranteed interest rate of the fixed account. A Guaranteed Period ends on the date after the number of calendar years in the Guaranteed Period. Interest will be credited daily at a guaranteed rate that is equal to the effective annual rate determined on the first day of the Guaranteed Period. Amounts surrendered, transferred or withdrawn prior to the end of the Guaranteed Period will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. Each Guaranteed Period Purchase Payment will be treated separately for purposes of determining any applicable Interest Adjustment.
You may transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:
•
fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and
•
the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.
Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Any amount withdrawn from the fixed account may be subject to any applicable account fees and premium taxes.
We will notify the Contractowner in writing at least 30 days prior to the expiration date for any Guaranteed Period amount. A new Guaranteed Period of the same duration as the previous Guaranteed Period will begin automatically at the end of the previous Guaranteed Period, unless we receive, prior to the end of a Guaranteed Period, a written election by the Contractowner. The written election may request the transfer of the Guaranteed Period amount to a different fixed account or to a variable Subaccount from among those being offered by us. Transfers of any Guaranteed Period amount which become effective upon the date of expiration of the applicable Guaranteed Period are not subject to the limitation of twelve transfers per Contract Year or the additional fixed account transfer restrictions.
Interest Adjustment
Any surrender, withdrawal or transfer of a Guaranteed Period amount before the end of the Guaranteed Period (other than dollar cost averaging or Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage) will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. A surrender, withdrawal or transfer effective upon the expiration date of the Guaranteed Period will not be subject to the Interest Adjustment. The Interest Adjustment will be applied to the amount being surrendered, withdrawn or transferred. The Interest Adjustment will be applied after the deduction of any applicable account fees and before any applicable transfer charges. Any transfer, withdrawal, or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account will be increased or decreased by an Interest Adjustment, unless the transfer, withdrawal or surrender is effective:
•
during the free look period (See Return Privilege).
•
on the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.
•
as a result of the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.
•
subsequent to the diagnosis of a terminal illness of the Contractowner. Diagnosis of the terminal illness must be after the effective date of the Contract and result in a life expectancy of less than one year, as determined by a qualified professional medical practitioner.
44
•
subsequent to the admittance of the Contractowner into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. Admittance into such facility must be after the effective date of the Contract and continue for 90 consecutive days prior to the surrender or withdrawal.
•
subsequent to the permanent and total disability of the Contractowner if such disability begins after the effective date of the Contract and prior to the 65th birthday of the Contractowner.
•
upon annuitization of the Contract.
These provisions may not be applicable to your Contract or available in your state. Please contact the Home Office or your financial professional regarding the availability of these provisions.
In general, the Interest Adjustment reflects the relationship between the yield rate in effect at the time a Purchase Payment is allocated to a fixed subaccount’s Guaranteed Period under the Contract and the yield rate in effect at the time of the Purchase Payment’s surrender, withdrawal or transfer. It also reflects the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period. If the yield rate at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer is lower than the yield rate at the time the Purchase Payment was allocated, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a higher payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. Similarly, if the yield rate at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer is higher than the yield rate at the time of the allocation of the Purchase Payment, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a lower payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. The yield rate is published by the Federal Reserve Board.
The Interest Adjustment is calculated by multiplying the transaction amount by: 
(1+A)n
–1
(1+B+K)n
 
where:
A
=
yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the Subaccount’s Guaranteed Period, determined at
the beginning of the Guaranteed Period.
B
=
yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period if greater
than one year, determined at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer. For remaining periods of one year or less, the
yield rate for a one year U.S. Treasury security is used.
K
=
a 0.25% adjustment (unless otherwise limited by applicable state law). This adjustment builds into the formula a factor
representing direct and indirect costs to us associated with liquidating general account assets in order to satisfy
surrender requests. This adjustment of 0.25% has been added to the denominator of the formula because it is anticipated
that a substantial portion of applicable general account portfolio assets will be in relatively illiquid securities. Thus, in
addition to direct transaction costs, if such securities must be sold (e.g., because of surrenders), the market price may be
lower. Accordingly, even if interest rates decline, there will not be a positive adjustment until this factor is overcome, and
then any adjustment will be lower than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. Similarly, if interest rates rise, any
negative adjustment will be greater than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. If interest rates stay the same, there will
be no Interest Adjustment.
n
=
The number of years remaining in the Guaranteed Period (e.g., 1 year and 73 days = 1 + (73 divided by 365) = 1.2 years).
 
 
Straight-Line interpolation is used for periods to maturity not quoted.
See the SAI for examples of the application of the Interest Adjustment.
Small Contract Surrenders
We may surrender your Contract, in accordance with the laws of your state if:
•
your Contract Value drops below certain state specified minimum amounts ($1,000 or less) for any reason, including if your Contract Value decreases due to the performance of the Subaccounts you selected;
•
no Purchase Payments have been received for two (2) full, consecutive Contract Years; and
•
the annuity benefit at the Annuity Commencement Date would be less than $20.00 per month (these requirements may differ in some states).
At least 60 days before we surrender your Contract, we will send you a letter at your last address we have on file, to inform you that your Contract will be surrendered. You will have the opportunity to make additional Purchase Payments to bring your Contract Value above the minimum level to avoid surrender. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders.
Delay of Payments
Contract proceeds from the VAA will be paid within seven days, except:
•
when the NYSE is closed (other than weekends and holidays);
45
•
times when market trading is restricted or the SEC declares an emergency, and we cannot value units or the funds cannot redeem shares; or
•
when the SEC so orders to protect Contractowners.
If, pursuant to SEC rules, an underlying money market fund suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of the fund, we will delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or Death Benefit from the money market subaccount until the fund is liquidated. Payment of contract proceeds from the fixed account may be delayed for up to six months.
Due to federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering by criminals, we may be required to reject a Purchase Payment and/or deny payment of a request for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders, or Death Benefits, until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator. We also may be required to provide additional information about a Contractowner's account to government regulators.
Reinvestment Privilege
You may elect to make a reinvestment purchase with any part of the proceeds of a surrender/withdrawal .
This election must be made by your written authorization to us on an approved Lincoln reinvestment form and received in our Home Office within 30 days of the date of the surrender/withdrawal, and the repurchase must be of a Contract covered by this prospectus. Lincoln reserves the right to not reinstate certain riders that were in effect prior to the surrender/withdrawal. In the case of a qualified retirement plan, a representation must be made that the proceeds being used to make the purchase have retained their tax-favored status under an arrangement for which the contracts offered by this prospectus are designed. The number of Accumulation Units which will be credited when the proceeds are reinvested will be based on the value of the Accumulation Unit(s) on the next Valuation Date. This computation will occur following receipt of the proceeds and request for reinvestment at the Home Office. You may utilize the reinvestment privilege only once. For tax reporting purposes, we will treat a surrender/withdrawal and a subsequent reinvestment purchase as separate transactions (and a Form 1099 may be issued, if applicable). Any taxable distribution that is reinvested may still be reported as taxable. You should consult a tax advisor before you request a surrender/withdrawal or subsequent reinvestment purchase.
Amendment of Contract
We reserve the right to amend the Contract to meet the requirements of the 1940 Act or other applicable federal or state laws or regulations. You will be notified in writing of any changes, modifications or waivers. Any changes are subject to prior approval of your state’s insurance department (if required).
Distribution of the Contracts
Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) serves as Principal Underwriter of this Contract. LFD is affiliated with Lincoln Life and is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and is a member of FINRA (“Financial Industry Regulatory Authority”). Applications for the contracts will be accepted at our Home Office. The Principal Underwriter has also entered into selling agreements with Lincoln Financial Advisors Corporation, and/or Lincoln Financial Securities Corporation (collectively “LFN”), each an affiliate of ours. While the Principal Underwriter has the legal authority to make payments to LFN, we will make such payments on behalf of the Principal Underwriter in compliance with appropriate regulations. We also pay on behalf of LFD certain of its operating expenses related to the distribution of this and other of our contracts.
The investment firm/professional providing services for this product is compensated directly by advisory fees paid by the Contractowner. Lincoln is not a party to this arrangement. You should ask your financial professional how the broker-dealer will be compensated for the sale of the Contract to you, or for any alternative proposal that may have been presented to you. You should take such compensation into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation made to you in connection with the purchase of a Contract. The following paragraphs describe how payments are made by us and the Principal Underwriter to various parties. We pay LFD a wholesaling allowance for distribution of the contracts.
Compensation Paid to LFN. No commissions are paid to LFN in connection with the sale of this Contract. However, Lincoln Life pays for the operating and other expenses of LFN, including the following sales expenses: financial professional training allowances; compensation and bonuses for LFN’s management team; advertising expenses; and all other expenses of distributing the contracts. LFN financial professionals and their managers are also eligible for various cash benefits, such as bonuses, insurance benefits and financing arrangements. In addition, LFN financial professionals who meet certain productivity, persistency and length of service standards and/or their managers may be eligible for additional compensation. Sales of the contracts that are sold through LFN may help LFN financial professionals and/or their managers qualify for such benefits. LFN financial professionals and their managers may receive other payments from us for services that do not directly involve the sale of the contracts, including payments made for the recruitment and training of personnel, production of promotional literature and similar services.
46
Incentives or payments described above are not charged directly to Contractowners or the VAA. All compensation is paid from our resources, which include fees and charges imposed on your Contract.
Contractowner Questions
The obligations to purchasers under the contracts are those of Lincoln Life. This prospectus provides a general description of the material features of the Contract. Contracts, endorsements and riders may vary as required by state law. Questions about your Contract should be directed to us at 1-877-534-8255.
Federal Tax Matters
Introduction
The Federal income tax treatment of the Contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The Federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances. This discussion does not include all the Federal income tax rules that may affect you and your Contract. This discussion also does not address other Federal tax consequences (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), or state or local tax consequences, associated with the Contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax advisor about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code (“Code”), Treasury Regulations and applicable IRS guidance to your individual situation.
Nonqualified Annuities
This part of the discussion describes some of the Federal income tax rules applicable to nonqualified annuities. A nonqualified annuity is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, such as an IRA or a section 403(b) plan, receiving special tax treatment under the Code. We may not offer nonqualified annuities for all of our annuity products.
Tax Deferral On Earnings
Under the Code, you are generally not subject to tax on any increase in your Contract Value until you receive a Contract distribution. However, for this general rule to apply, certain requirements must be satisfied:
•
An individual must own the Contract (or the Code must treat the Contract as owned by an individual).
•
The investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Treasury regulations.
•
Your right to choose particular investments for a Contract must be limited.
•
The Annuity Commencement Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.
Contracts Not Owned By An Individual
If a Contract is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) the Code generally does not treat it as an annuity contract for Federal income tax purposes. This means that the entity owning the Contract pays tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Examples of contracts where the owner pays current tax on the Contract’s earnings, if applicable, are contracts issued to a corporation or a trust. Some exceptions to the rule are:
•
Contracts in which the named owner is a trust or other entity that holds the Contract as an agent for an individual; however, this exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees;
•
Immediate annuity contracts, purchased with a single premium, when the annuity starting date is no later than a year from purchase and substantially equal periodic payments are made, not less frequently than annually, during the Annuity Payout period;
•
Contracts acquired by an estate of a decedent;
•
Certain qualified contracts;
•
Contracts purchased by employers upon the termination of certain qualified plans; and
•
Certain contracts used in connection with structured settlement agreements.
Investments In The VAA Must Be Diversified
For a Contract to be treated as an annuity for Federal income tax purposes, the investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified.” Treasury regulations define standards for determining whether the investments of the VAA are adequately diversified. If the VAA fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required to pay tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Although we do not control the investments of the underlying investment options, we expect that the underlying investment options will comply with the Treasury regulations so that the VAA will be considered “adequately diversified.”
47
Restrictions
The Code limits your right to choose particular investments for the Contract. Because the IRS has issued little guidance specifying those limits, the limits are uncertain and your right to allocate Contract Values among the Subaccounts may exceed those limits. If so, you would be treated as the owner of the assets of the VAA and thus subject to current taxation on the income and gains, if applicable, from those assets. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any guidance that it may issue and whether any such limits will apply to existing contracts. We reserve the right to modify the Contract without your consent in an attempt to prevent you from being considered as the owner of the assets of the VAA for purposes of the Code.
Loss Of Interest Deduction
After June 8, 1997, if a Contract is issued to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or if a Contract is held for the benefit of an entity, the entity may lose a portion of its deduction for otherwise deductible interest expenses. However, this rule does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the life of one individual who is either (i) a 20% Owner of the entity, or (ii) an officer, director, or employee of the trade or business, at the time first covered by the Contract. This rule also does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the joint lives of the 20% Owner or the entity and the Owner’s spouse at the time first covered by the Contract.
Age At Which Annuity Payouts Begin
The Code does not expressly identify a particular age by which Annuity Payouts must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through Annuity Payouts, of the Contract’s Purchase Payments and earnings. As long as annuity payments begin or are scheduled to begin on a date on which the Annuitant’s remaining life expectancy is enough to allow for a sufficient Annuity Payout period, the Contract should be treated as an annuity. If the annuity contract is not treated as an annuity, you would be currently taxed on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract.
Tax Treatment Of Payments
We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any Contract or of any transaction involving a Contract. However, the rest of this discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity under the Code and that any increase in your Contract Value will not be taxed until there is a distribution from your Contract.
Taxation Of Withdrawals And Surrenders
You will pay tax on withdrawals to the extent your Contract Value exceeds your investment in the Contract. This income (and all other income from your Contract) is considered ordinary income (and does not receive capital gains treatment and is not qualified dividend income). You will pay tax on a surrender to the extent the amount you receive exceeds your investment in the Contract. In certain circumstances, your Purchase Payments and investment in the Contract are reduced by amounts received from your Contract that were not included in income. Surrender and reinstatement of your Contract will generally be taxed as a withdrawal. If your Contract has a Living Benefit Rider, and if the guaranteed amount under that rider immediately before a withdrawal exceeds your Contract Value, the Code may require that you include those additional amounts in your income. Please consult your tax advisor.
Payment of Investment Advisory Fees
On August 6, 2019, the IRS issued a private letter ruling (the “PLR”) to Lincoln that addressed the treatment of investment advisory fees (“Advisory Fee Withdrawals”) paid out of the cash value of a non-qualified annuity contract. The PLR concluded that if a Contractowner authorizes payment of investment advisory fees out of the cash value of the non-qualified annuity contract, the payment of those fees will not be treated as a distribution to the Contractowner. In order for this treatment to apply, the investment advisory fees must be determined based on an arms-length transaction between the Contractowner and the financial professional, and cannot exceed an amount equal to an annual rate of 1.50% of the non-qualified annuity contract’s cash value. The fees can only compensate the financial professional for investment advice provided to the Contractowner with respect to the non-qualified annuity contract, and cannot compensate the financial professional for any other services. Effective for tax year 2019 and beyond, if you have authorized Lincoln to pay fees from the cash value of your non-qualified annuity Contract directly to your financial professional, Lincoln will not treat the payment of such fees as a distribution from your Contract if all the conditions mentioned above are satisfied.
Taxation Of Annuity Payouts, including Regular Income Payments
The Code imposes tax on a portion of each Annuity Payout (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your investment in the Contract. We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your Annuity Payout. Once you have recovered the total amount of the investment in the Contract, you will pay tax on the full amount of your Annuity Payouts. If Annuity Payouts end because of the Annuitant’s death and before the total amount in the Contract has been distributed, the amount not received will generally be deductible. If withdrawals, other than Regular Income Payments, are taken from i4LIFE® Advantage during the Access Period, they are taxed subject to an exclusion ratio that is determined based on the amount of the payment.
48
Taxation Of Death Benefits
We may distribute amounts from your Contract because of the death of a Contractowner or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the Contractowner or the Annuitant dies before or after the Annuity Commencement Date.
Death prior to the Annuity Commencement Date:
•
If the Beneficiary receives Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as Annuity Payouts.
•
If the Beneficiary does not receive Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as a withdrawal.
Death after the Annuity Commencement Date:
•
If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of a Contractowner who is not the Annuitant, they are excludible from income in the same manner as the Annuity Payout prior to the death of the Contractowner.
•
If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of the Annuitant (whether or not the Annuitant is also the Contractowner), the Death Benefits are excludible from income if they do not exceed the investment in the Contract not yet distributed from the Contract. All Annuity Payouts in excess of the investment in the Contract not previously received are includible in income.
•
If Death Benefits are received in a lump sum, the Code imposes tax on the amount of Death Benefits which exceeds the amount of Purchase Payments not previously received.
Additional Taxes Payable On Withdrawals, Surrenders, Or Annuity Payouts
The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on any distribution from your Contract which you must include in your gross income. The 10% additional tax does not apply if one of several exceptions exists. These exceptions include withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts that:
•
you receive on or after you reach 59½,
•
you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the Code),
•
you receive from an immediate annuity,
•
a Beneficiary receives on or after your death, or
•
you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on your life or life expectancy (non-natural owners holding as agent for an individual do not qualify).
Unearned Income Medicare Contribution
Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax, which affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual's “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual's modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Unearned income includes the taxable portion of distributions that you take from your annuity contract. If you take a distribution from your Contract that may be subject to the tax, we will include a Distribution Code “D” in Box 7 of the Form 1099-R issued to report the distribution. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.
Special Rules If You Own More Than One Annuity Contract
In certain circumstances, you must combine some or all of the nonqualified annuity contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an Annuity Payout, a surrender, or a withdrawal that you must include in income. For example, if you purchase two or more deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract. Treating two or more contracts as one contract could affect the amount of a surrender, a withdrawal or an Annuity Payout that you must include in income and the amount that might be subject to the additional tax described previously.
Loans and Assignments
Except for certain qualified contracts, the Code treats any amount received as a loan under your Contract, and any assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of your Contract Value, as a withdrawal of such amount or portion.
Gifting A Contract
If you transfer ownership of your Contract to a person other than to your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), and receive a payment less than your Contract’s value, you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your investment in the Contract not previously received. The new owner’s investment in the Contract would then be increased to reflect the amount included in income.
49
Charges for Additional Benefits
Your Contract automatically includes a basic Death Benefit and may include other optional riders. Certain enhancements to the basic Death Benefit may also be available to you. The cost of the basic Death Benefit and any additional benefit are deducted from your Contract. It is possible that the tax law may treat all or a portion of the Death Benefit and other optional protected lifetime income fees, if any, as a contract withdrawal.
Special Considerations for Same-Sex Spouses
In 2013, the U.S. Supreme Court held that same-sex spouses who are married under state law are treated as spouses for purposes of federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.
Qualified Retirement Plans
We have designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with a qualified retirement plan are called “qualified contracts.” We issue contracts for use with various types of qualified retirement plans. The Federal income tax rules applicable to those plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus does not attempt to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons planning to use the Contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a competent tax advisor.
Types of Qualified Contracts and Terms of Contracts
Qualified retirement plans may include the following:
•
Individual Retirement Accounts and Annuities (“Traditional IRAs”)
•
Roth IRAs
•
Traditional IRA that is part of a Simplified Employee Pension Plan (“SEP”)
•
SIMPLE 401(k) plans (Savings Incentive Matched Plan for Employees)
•
401(a) / (k) plans (qualified corporate employee pension and profit-sharing plans)
•
403(a) plans (qualified annuity plans)
•
403(b) plans (public school system and tax-exempt organization annuity plans)
•
H.R. 10 or Keogh Plans (self-employed individual plans)
•
457(b) plans (deferred compensation plans for state and local governments and tax-exempt organizations)
Our individual variable annuity products are not available for use with any of the foregoing qualified retirement plan accounts, with the exception of Traditional IRA, SEP IRA, and Roth IRA arrangements. We will amend contracts to be used with a qualified retirement plan as generally necessary to conform to the Code’s requirements for the type of plan. However, the rights of a person to any qualified retirement plan benefits may be subject to the plan’s terms and conditions, regardless of the contract’s terms and conditions. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act of 2019
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act (the “SECURE Act”) was enacted on December 20, 2019. The SECURE Act made a number of significant changes to the rules that apply to qualified retirement plans and IRA’s, including the following:
•
Eliminated the age 70½ limit for making contributions to an IRA. Beginning in 2020, an IRA owner can make contributions to his or her IRA at any age.
•
Changed the required minimum distribution rules that apply after the death of a participant or IRA owner.
•
Created the “Qualified Birth or Adoption” exception to the 10% additional tax on early distributions.
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement 2.0 (SECURE 2.0)
The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE 2.0) Act (the “SECURE 2.0 Act”) was enacted on December 29, 2022. The SECURE 2.0 Act made specific changes to retirement plans and IRA’s, including:
•
Increased the required beginning date measuring age from age 72 to 73 for any participant or IRA owner who did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023. As a result, required minimum distributions are generally required to begin by April 1 of the year following the year in which the participant or IRA owner reaches age 73.
•
Further increased the required beginning date measuring age to 75 by 2033.
•
Created exception to the 10% additional tax for distributions for domestic violence and emergencies.
•
Added provisions that permit rollover of 529 plan amounts to a Roth IRA for the beneficiary, within certain limits.
50
Tax Treatment of Qualified Contracts
The Federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and qualified contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example:
•
Federal tax rules limit the amount of Purchase Payments or contributions that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the contributions. These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the participant’s specific circumstances (e.g., the participant’s compensation).
•
Minimum annual distributions are required under some qualified retirement plans once you reach age 73 or retire, if later as described below.
•
Loans are allowed under certain types of qualified retirement plans, but Federal income tax rules prohibit loans under other types of qualified retirement plans. For example, Federal income tax rules permit loans under some section 403(b) plans, but prohibit loans under Traditional and Roth IRAs. If allowed, loans are subject to a variety of limitations, including restrictions as to the loan amount, the loan’s duration, the rate of interest, and the manner of repayment. Your Contract or plan may not permit loans.
Please note that qualified retirement plans such as 403(b) plans, 401(k) plans and IRAs generally defer taxation of contributions and earnings until distribution. As such, an annuity does not provide any additional tax deferral benefit beyond the qualified retirement plan itself.
Tax Treatment of Payments
The Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a qualified contract in the participant’s income as ordinary income. These taxable distributions will include contributions that were deductible or excludible from income. Thus, under many qualified contracts, the total amount received is included in income since a deduction or exclusion from income was taken for contributions to the contract. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA in income if certain conditions are satisfied.
Required Minimum Distributions
Under most qualified plans, you must begin receiving payments from the Contract in certain minimum amounts by your “required beginning date”. Prior to the SECURE 2.0 Act, the required beginning date was April 1 of the year following the year you attain age 72 or retired. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1 of the year following the year in which you attain age 73 or retire. If you own a traditional IRA, your required beginning date under prior law was April 1 of the year following the year in which you attained age 72. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1 of the year following the year in which you attain age 73. If you own a Roth IRA, you are not required to receive minimum distributions from your Roth IRA during your life.
Failure to comply with the minimum distribution rules applicable to certain qualified plans, such as Traditional IRAs, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax equals 50% of the amount by which a required minimum distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified plan.
Treasury regulations applicable to required minimum distributions include a rule that may impact the distribution method you have chosen and the amount of your distributions. Under these regulations, the presence of an enhanced Death Benefit, or other benefit which could provide additional value to your Contract, may require you to take additional distributions. An enhanced Death Benefit is any Death Benefit that has the potential to pay more than the Contract Value or a return of investment in the Contract. Annuity contracts inside Custodial or Trusteed IRAs will also be subject to these regulations. Please contact your tax advisor regarding any tax ramifications.
Additional Tax on Early Distributions from Qualified Retirement Plans
The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on an early distribution from a qualified contract that must be included in income. The Code does not impose the additional tax if one of several exceptions applies. The exceptions vary depending on the type of qualified contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, the 10% additional tax will not apply to any of the following withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts:
•
Distribution received on or after the Annuitant reaches 59½,
•
Distribution received on or after the Annuitant’s death or because of the Annuitant’s disability (as defined in the Code),
•
Distribution received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on the Annuitant’s life (or life expectancy),
•
Distribution received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care, or
•
Distribution received for a “qualified birth or adoption” event.
These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.
51
Unearned Income Medicare Contribution
Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual’s “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Distributions that you take from your Contract are not included in the calculation of unearned income because your Contract is a qualified plan contract. However, the amount of any such distribution is included in determining whether you exceed the modified adjusted gross income threshold. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.
Transfers and Direct Rollovers
As a result of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 (EGTRRA), you may be able to move funds between different types of qualified plans, such as 403(b) and 457(b) governmental plans, by means of a rollover or transfer. You may be able to rollover or transfer amounts between qualified plans and traditional IRAs. These rules do not apply to Roth IRAs and 457(b) non-governmental tax-exempt plans. There are special rules that apply to rollovers, direct rollovers and transfers (including rollovers or transfers of after-tax amounts). If the applicable rules are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. Before we send a rollover distribution, we will provide a notice explaining tax withholding requirements (see Federal Income Tax Withholding). We are not required to send you such notice for your IRA. You should always consult your tax advisor before you move or attempt to move any funds.
The IRS issued Announcement 2014-32 confirming its intent to apply the one-rollover-per-year limitation of 408(d)(3)(B) on an aggregate basis to all IRAs that an individual owns. This means that an individual cannot make a tax-free IRA-to-IRA rollover if he or she has made such a rollover involving any of the individual’s IRAs in the current tax year. If an intended rollover does not qualify for tax-free rollover treatment, contributions to your IRA may constitute excess contributions that may exceed contribution limits. This one-rollover-per-year limitation does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers.
Direct Conversions and Recharacterizations
The Pension Protection Act of 2006 (PPA) permits direct conversions from certain qualified, retirement, 403(b) or 457(b) plans to Roth IRAs (effective for distributions after 2007). You are also permitted to recharacterize your traditional IRA contribution as a Roth IRA contribution, and to recharacterize your Roth IRA contribution as a traditional IRA contribution. The deadline for the recharacterization is the due date (including extensions) for your individual income tax return for the year in which the contribution was made. Upon recharacterization, you are treated as having made the contribution originally to the second IRA account. The recharacterization does not count toward the one-rollover-per-year limitation described above.
Effective for tax years beginning after December 31, 2017, pursuant to the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (Pub. L. No. 115-97), recharacterizations are no longer allowed in the case of a conversion from a non-Roth account or annuity to a Roth IRA. This limitation applies to conversions made from pre-tax accounts under an IRA, qualified retirement plan, 403(b) plan, or 457(b) plan. Roth IRA conversions made in 2017 may be recharacterized as a contribution to a traditional IRA if the recharacterization is completed by October 15, 2018.
There are special rules that apply to conversions and recharacterizations, and if they are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences. You should consult your tax advisor before completing a conversion or recharacterization.
Death Benefit and IRAs
Pursuant to Treasury regulations, IRAs may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations prohibit the Death Benefit from being provided under the Contract when we issue the Contract as a Traditional or Roth IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the Death Benefit under a Contract issued as a Traditional or Roth IRA could result in increased taxes to you. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available for all of our products.
Federal Income Tax Withholding
We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a Contract unless you notify us in writing prior to the distribution that tax is not to be withheld. In certain circumstances, Federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time a withdrawal, surrender, or Annuity Payout is requested, we will give you an explanation of the withholding requirements.
Certain payments from your Contract may be considered eligible rollover distributions (even if such payments are not being rolled over). Such distributions may be subject to special tax withholding requirements. The Federal income tax withholding rules require that we withhold 20% of the eligible rollover distribution from the payment amount, unless you elect to have the amount directly transferred to certain qualified plans or contracts. The IRS requires that tax be withheld, even if you have requested otherwise. Such tax withholding requirements are generally applicable to 401(a), 403(a) or (b), HR 10, and 457(b) governmental plans and contracts used in connection with these types of plans.
52
Our Tax Status
Under the Code, we are not required to pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the VAA. We do not expect that we will incur any Federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the VAA. However, the Company does expect, to the extent permitted under the Code, to claim the benefit of the foreign tax credit as the owner of the assets of the VAA. Therefore, we do not impose a charge for Federal income taxes. If there are any changes in the Code that require us to pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the VAA, we may impose a charge against the VAA to pay the taxes.
Changes in the Law
The above discussion is based on the Code, related regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. However, Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, sometimes retroactively.
Additional Information
Voting Rights
As required by law, we will vote the fund shares held in the VAA at meetings of the shareholders of the funds. The voting will be done according to the instructions of Contractowners who have interests in any Subaccounts which invest in classes of the funds. If the 1940 Act or any regulation under it should be amended or if present interpretations should change, and if as a result we determine that we are permitted to vote the fund shares in our own right, we may elect to do so.
The number of votes which you have the right to cast will be determined by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, fractional shares will be recognized.
Each underlying fund is subject to the laws of the state in which it is organized concerning, among other things, the matters which are subject to a shareholder vote, the number of shares which must be present in person or by proxy at a meeting of shareholders (a “quorum”), and the percentage of such shares present in person or by proxy which must vote in favor of matters presented. Because shares of the underlying fund held in the VAA are owned by us, and because under the 1940 Act we will vote all such shares in the same proportion as the voting instructions which we receive, it is important that each Contractowner provide their voting instructions to us. For funds un-affiliated with Lincoln, even though Contractowners may choose not to provide voting instruction, the shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. For funds affiliated with Lincoln, shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will, once we receive a sufficient number of instructions we deem appropriate to ensure a fair representation of Contractowners eligible to vote, be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. As a result, the instruction of a small number of Contractowners could determine the outcome of matters subject to shareholder vote. All shares voted by us will be counted when the underlying fund determines whether any requirement for a minimum number of shares be present at such a meeting to satisfy a quorum requirement has been met. Voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on will be applied proportionately to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.
Whenever a shareholders meeting is called, we will provide or make available to each person having a voting interest in a Subaccount proxy voting material, reports and other materials relating to the funds. Since the funds engage in shared funding, other persons or entities besides Lincoln Life may vote fund shares. See Investments of the Variable Annuity Account.
Return Privilege
Within the free-look period after you receive the Contract, you may cancel it for any reason by sending us a letter of instruction, indicating your intent to exercise the free-look provision. A Contract canceled under this provision will be void. Except as explained in the following paragraph, we will return the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes which had been deducted. No Interest Adjustment will apply. There are no additional Investment Requirements during the free-look period other than as required under an elected optional benefit. A purchaser who participates in the VAA is subject to the risk of a market loss on the Contract Value during the free-look period.
For contracts written in those states whose laws require that we assume this market risk during the free-look period, a Contract may be canceled, subject to the conditions explained before, except that we will return the greater of the Purchase Payment(s) or Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we receive the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes that had been deducted. IRA purchasers will also receive the greater of Purchase Payments or Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request. Any advisory fees paid to your advisor during the free-look period will not be returned.
State Regulation
As a life insurance company organized and operated under Indiana law, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Indiana Commissioner of Insurance. Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the Indiana Department of Insurance at all times. A full examination of our operations is conducted by that Department at least every five years.
53
Records and Reports
As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the VAA. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, c/o WeWork, 1100 Main Street, Suite 400, Kansas City, MO 64105, to provide accounting services to the VAA. We will mail to you, at your last known address of record at the Home Office, at least semi-annually after the first Contract Year, reports containing information required by that Act or any other applicable law or regulation.
A written (or electronic, if elected) confirmation of each transaction will be provided to you on the next Valuation Date, except for the following transactions, which are mailed quarterly:
•
deduction of any account fee or protected lifetime income fees;
•
crediting of persistency credits, if applicable;
•
any rebalancing event under Investment Requirements or the portfolio rebalancing service;
•
any transfer or withdrawal under any applicable additional service: dollar cost averaging or AWS; and
•
Regular Income Payments from i4LIFE® Advantage.
Other Information
You may elect to receive your prospectus, prospectus supplements, quarterly statements, and annual and semiannual reports electronically over the Internet, if you have an e-mail account and access to an Internet browser. Once you select eDelivery, via the Internet Service Center, all documents available in electronic format will no longer be sent to you in hard copy. You will receive an e-mail notification when the documents become available online. It is your responsibility to provide us with your current e-mail address. You can resume paper mailings at any time without cost, by updating your profile at the Internet Service Center, or contacting us. To learn more about this service, please log on to www.LincolnFinancial.com, select service centers and continue on through the Internet Service Center.
Legal Proceedings
In the ordinary course of its business and otherwise, the Company and its subsidiaries or its separate accounts and Principal Underwriter may become or are involved in various pending or threatened regulatory or legal proceedings, including purported class actions, arising from the conduct of its business. In some instances, the proceedings include claims for unspecified or substantial punitive damages and similar types of relief in addition to amounts for alleged contractual liability or requests for equitable relief.
After consultation with legal counsel and a review of available facts, it is management’s opinion that the proceedings, after consideration of any reserves and rights to indemnification, ultimately will be resolved without any material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company and its subsidiaries, or the financial position of its separate accounts or Principal Underwriter. However, given the large and indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these proceedings and the inherent difficulty in predicting the outcome of such proceedings, it is reasonably possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could be material to the Company’s operating results for any particular reporting period.
Please refer to the Statement of Additional Information for possible additional information regarding legal proceedings.
54
Appendix A — Funds Available Under The Contract
The following is a list of funds currently available under the Contract. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain funds. Current performance of the Subaccounts can be found at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. More information about the funds is available in the prospectuses for the Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. You can also request this information and current fund performance at no cost by calling 1-877-534-8255 or by sending an email request to CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com.
The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Fund, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your Contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these other charges were included. Each fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. 
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
High total return (including income and
capital gains) consistent with
preservation of capital over the long
term.
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund -
Class 1
0.30%
14.55%
9.47%
7.51%
Seeks to provide a level of current
income that exceeds the average yield
on U.S. stocks generally and to provide
a growing stream of income over the
years.
American Funds Capital Income
Builder® - Class 1
0.28%2
9.28%
7.72%
N/A
To provide, over the long term, with a
high level of total return consistent with
prudent investment management.
American Funds Capital World Bond
Fund - Class 1
0.48%
6.39%
-0.07%
0.62%
Long-term growth of capital while
providing current income.
American Funds Capital World Growth
and Income Fund - Class 1
0.41%2
21.22%
10.60%
7.90%
The balanced accomplishment of three
objectives: long-term growth of capital,
conservation of principal and current
income.
American Funds Global Balanced Fund -
Class 1
0.52%2
14.05%
7.69%
5.66%
Long-term growth of capital.
American Funds Global Growth Fund -
Class 1
0.41%2
22.91%
13.93%
9.85%
Long-term capital growth.
American Funds Global Small
Capitalization Fund - Class 1
0.66%2
16.45%
8.57%
6.04%
Growth of capital.
American Funds Growth Fund - Class 1
0.34%
38.81%
18.97%
14.64%
Long-term growth of capital and income.
American Funds Growth-Income Fund -
Class 1
0.28%
26.47%
13.65%
11.19%
To provide investors with a high level of
current income; capital appreciation is
the secondary objective.
American Funds High-Income Trust -
Class 1
0.32%2
12.69%
6.36%
4.67%
Long-term growth of capital.
American Funds International Fund -
Class 1
0.53%
16.12%
5.10%
3.67%
Long-term growth of capital while
providing current income.
American Funds International Growth
and Income Fund - Class 1
0.56%
16.08%
6.38%
3.57%
To provide high total return (including
income and capital gains) consistent
with preservation of capital over the long
term while seeking to manage volatility
and provide downside protection. A fund
of funds.
American Funds Managed Risk Asset
Allocation Fund - Class P1
0.65%2
10.51%
6.17%
5.01%
A-1
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
To provide growth of capital while
seeking to manage volatility and provide
downside protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds Managed Risk Growth
Fund - Class P1
0.69%2
23.77%
11.26%
8.62%
To achieve long-term growth of capital
and income while seeking to manage
volatility and provide downside
protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds Managed Risk Growth-
Income Fund - Class P1
0.62%2
16.17%
7.86%
6.46%
To provide long-term growth of capital
while seeking to manage volatility and
provide downside protection. A fund of
funds.
American Funds Managed Risk
International Fund - Class P1
0.85%2
6.36%
1.04%
0.58%
To produce income and to provide an
opportunity for growth of principal
consistent with sound common stock
investing while seeking to manage
volatility and provide downside
protection. A fund of funds.
American Funds Managed Risk
Washington Mutual Investors Fund -
Class P1
0.64%2
10.04%
5.89%
5.08%
To provide current income and
preservation of capital.
American Funds Mortgage Fund - Class
1
0.32%2
4.03%
1.06%
1.74%
Long-term capital appreciation.
American Funds New World Fund® -
Class 1
0.57%2
16.22%
8.90%
4.95%
To provide as high a level of current
income as is consistent with the
preservation of capital.
American Funds The Bond Fund of
America - Class 1
0.23%2
5.21%
2.14%
2.33%
To provide a high level of current income
consistent with prudent investment risk
and preservation of capital.
American Funds U.S. Government
Securities Fund - Class 1
0.26%2
3.21%
1.31%
1.78%
To produce income and to provide an
opportunity for growth of principal
consistent with sound common stock
investing.
American Funds Washington Mutual
Investors Fund - Class 1
0.27%2
17.66%
12.90%
10.19%
Long-term growth of capital.
ClearBridge Variable Large Cap Growth
Portfolio - Class I
advised by Legg Mason Partners Fund
Advisor, LLC
0.76%
44.02%
15.51%
13.27%
Long-term growth of capital.
ClearBridge Variable Mid Cap Portfolio -
Class I
advised by Legg Mason Partners Fund
Advisor, LLC
0.83%
12.92%
10.73%
7.10%
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
DWS Alternative Asset Allocation VIP
Portfolio - Class A
advised by DWS Investment
Management Americas, Inc.
0.83%
6.19%
6.09%
2.96%
Income and capital growth consistent
with reasonable risk.
Fidelity® VIP Balanced Portfolio - Initial
Class
0.44%
21.53%
12.44%
9.08%
High total return. A fund of funds.
Fidelity® VIP FundsManager® 50%
Portfolio - Investor Class
0.70%2
12.96%
7.52%
5.51%
A-2
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
To provide long-term capital
appreciation.
First Trust Capital Strength Hedged
Equity Portfolio – Class I
1.25%2
N/A
N/A
N/A
To provide long-term capital
appreciation.
First Trust Growth Strength Portfolio –
Class I
1.20%2
N/A
N/A
N/A
To provide capital appreciation.
First Trust International Developed
Capital Strength Portfolio – Class I
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
1.20%2
16.90%
N/A
N/A
To provide total return by allocating
among dividend-paying stocks and
investment grade bonds.
First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend &
Income Allocation Portfolio - Class I6
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
1.19%
10.51%
7.23%
6.53%
Balance of growth of capital and income.
A fund of funds.
Franklin Multi-Asset Variable
Conservative Growth - Class I
advised by Legg Mason Partners Fund
Advisor, LLC
0.72%
14.63%
7.39%
5.61%
Long-term growth of capital.
Invesco V.I. EQV International Equity
Fund - Series I Shares
0.90%
18.15%
8.42%
4.33%
Seeks, over a specified annual period
(an “Outcome Period”), to provide
returns that track those of the Invesco
QQQ TrustSM , Series 1 up to a cap,
while providing a buffer against losses.
A fund of funds.
Lincoln Hedged Nasdaq-100 Fund -
Standard Class
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.85%2
36.82%
N/A
N/A
Over a specified annual period (an
“Outcome Period”), to provide returns
that track those of the S&P 500 Price
Return Index (“Index”) up to a cap, while
providing a buffer against losses. A fund
of funds.
Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Conservative
Fund - Standard Class4
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.70%2
13.39%
N/A
N/A
Over a specified annual period (an
“Outcome Period”), to provide returns
that track those of the S&P 500 Price
Return Index (“Index”) up to a cap, while
providing a buffer against losses. A fund
of funds.
Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Fund -
Standard Class4
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.70%2
17.03%
N/A
N/A
Seeks, over a specified annual period
(an “Outcome Period”), to provide
returns that track those of the Invesco
QQQ TrustSM , Series 1 up to a cap,
while providing a buffer against losses.
A fund of funds.
Lincoln Opportunistic Hedged Equity
Fund - Standard Class
0.70%2
N/A
N/A
N/A
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with an emphasis on growth of capital. A
fund of funds.
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
- Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.58%2
13.68%
8.01%
6.09%
A-3
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Capital growth.
LVIP American Century Capital
Appreciation Fund - Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.79%2
20.69%
13.24%
9.36%
Capital growth; income is a secondary
consideration.
LVIP American Century Disciplined Core
Value Fund - Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.71%2
8.65%
10.19%
8.19%
Long-term total return using a strategy
that seeks to protect against U.S.
inflation.
LVIP American Century Inflation
Protection Fund - Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.52%2
3.60%
2.90%
2.16%
Capital growth.
LVIP American Century International
Fund - Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.95%2
12.57%
8.29%
4.07%
Long-term capital growth, income is
secondary objective.
LVIP American Century Large Company
Value Fund - Standard Class II
(formerly American Century VP Large
Company Value Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.70%2
3.88%
10.53%
7.73%
Long-term capital growth, income is
secondary objective.
LVIP American Century Mid Cap Value
Fund - Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.86%2
6.13%
11.05%
8.77%
Long-term capital growth.
LVIP American Century Ultra Fund -
Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.75%2
43.51%
19.24%
14.64%
A-4
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Long-term capital growth; income is a
secondary consideration.
LVIP American Century Value Fund -
Standard Class II
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund will be available on or about
May 20, 2024. Please consult your
registered representative.
0.71%2
9.10%
11.87%
8.53%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital. A
fund of funds.
LVIP American Global Balanced
Allocation Managed Risk Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.60%
11.80%
5.76%
4.50%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with a greater emphasis on growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.62%
13.97%
6.19%
4.50%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with a greater emphasis on growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.59%2
14.95%
8.55%
6.49%
A high level of current income with
some consideration given to growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.58%2
10.77%
6.10%
4.87%
Current income, consistent with the
preservation of capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP American Preservation Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.51%2
4.10%
1.33%
1.35%
Reasonable income.
LVIP BlackRock Dividend Value
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.66%2
9.39%
9.55%
6.43%
High total investment return.
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.73%2
13.62%
N/A
N/A
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.83%2
11.65%
5.03%
2.80%
A balance between current income and
growth of capital, with a greater
emphasis on growth of capital. A fund of
funds.
LVIP BlackRock Global Growth ETF
Allocation Managed Risk Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.42%2
11.68%
4.81%
N/A
To maximize real return, consistent with
preservation of real capital and prudent
investment management.
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.63%
5.07%
3.16%
2.19%
A-5
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
A balance between current income and
growth of capital, with a greater
emphasis on growth of capital. A fund of
funds.
LVIP BlackRock U.S. Growth ETF
Allocation Managed Risk Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.39%2
12.35%
5.73%
N/A
Capital Appreciation.
LVIP Blended Mid Cap Managed
Volatility Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.73%2
17.75%
10.22%
6.41%
Seeks long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP Channing Small Cap Value Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.88%
19.94%
N/A
N/A
Capital Appreciation.
LVIP ClearBridge Franklin Select Large
Cap Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.66%2
22.54%
11.10%
N/A
Long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP Dimensional International Core
Equity Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.62%2
16.01%
7.99%
N/A
Long-term capital appreciation. A fund
of funds.
LVIP Dimensional International Equity
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.76%
16.69%
5.51%
2.29%
Long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Core Equity 1
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.40%2
22.78%
14.99%
11.07%
Long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Core Equity 2
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.49%
21.65%
14.73%
N/A
Long-term capital appreciation. A fund
of funds.
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Equity Managed
Volatility Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.61%2
21.95%
12.87%
8.02%
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP Fidelity Institutional AM® Select
Core Equity Managed Volatility Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.64%2
25.25%
13.23%
8.44%
To maximize long-term capital
appreciation.
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor
Emerging Markets Equity Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.50%2
10.04%
3.12%
1.60%
A-6
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
To maximize long-term capital
appreciation.
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor
International Equity Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.41%2
18.92%
6.73%
4.40%
To maximize long-term capital
appreciation.
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor
Large Cap Equity Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.36%2
17.39%
12.81%
10.06%
To maximize long-term capital
appreciation.
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor
SMID Cap Equity Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.39%2
15.54%
11.42%
7.16%
Capital appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth
Allocation Managed Risk Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.79%2
14.09%
5.66%
N/A
A high level of current income with
some consideration given to growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.77%2
9.72%
4.23%
3.52%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with a greater emphasis on growth of
capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed
Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.76%2
13.33%
4.97%
3.72%
A balance between a high level of
current income and growth of capital,
with an emphasis on growth of capital. A
fund of funds.
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.75%2
11.84%
4.56%
3.56%
Current income while (i)maintaining a
stable value of your shares (providing
stability of net asset value) and (ii)
preserving the value of your initial
investment (preservation of capital).
LVIP Government Money Market Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.39%2
4.75%
1.61%
0.99%
Capital Appreciation.
LVIP Invesco Select Equity Income
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
This fund is not available in contracts
issued on or after February 8, 2016.
0.58%2
12.18%
10.09%
N/A
To maximize total return by investing
primarily in a diversified portfolio of
intermediate- and long-term debt
securities.
LVIP JPMorgan Core Bond Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.49%
5.91%
1.28%
1.81%
A-7
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Capital appreciation with the secondary
goal of achieving current income by
investing in equity securities.
LVIP JPMorgan Mid Cap Value Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.74%
10.91%
10.98%
8.05%
Current income and some capital
appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP JPMorgan Retirement Income Fund
- Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.68%2
11.60%
5.02%
3.94%
Long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP JPMorgan Select Mid Cap Value
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.78%2
12.08%
9.25%
5.62%
Capital growth over the long term.
LVIP JPMorgan Small Cap Core Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.78%
13.10%
9.41%
7.10%
High total return.
LVIP JPMorgan U.S. Equity Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.69%
27.16%
17.15%
12.44%
Total return.
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate
Fund - Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware Diversified
Floating Rate Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.63%2
5.57%
2.38%
1.68%
Maximum long-term total return
consistent with reasonable risk.
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
- Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware Diversified
Income Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.54%2
6.24%
2.07%
2.09%
Total return and, as a secondary
objective, high current income.
LVIP Macquarie High Yield Fund -
Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware High Yield
Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.74%2
12.67%
5.51%
3.53%
Maximum total return, consistent with
reasonable risk.
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified
Income Fund - Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware Limited-Term
Diversified Income Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.53%2
5.00%
1.88%
1.63%
A-8
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Long-term capital appreciation.
LVIP Macquarie SMID Cap Core Fund -
Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware SMID Cap Core
Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.80%2
16.45%
12.25%
8.36%
To provide a responsible level of income
and the potential for capital appreciation.
LVIP Macquarie Wealth Builder Fund -
Standard Class3
(formerly LVIP Delaware Wealth Builder
Fund)
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.71%2
9.91%
5.95%
4.45%
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP MFS International Equity Managed
Volatility Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.93%2
13.89%
6.79%
4.20%
Long-term growth of capital. A fund of
funds.
LVIP Multi-Manager Global Equity
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.79%2
26.01%
10.64%
N/A
To seek a high level of current income
consistent with preservation of capital.
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.68%2
4.87%
1.30%
N/A
To match as closely as practicable,
before fees and expenses, the
performance of the Bloomberg U.S.
Aggregate Index.
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.37%2
5.30%
0.78%
1.49%
To provide investment results that,
before fees and expenses, correspond
generally to the total return of the MSCI
Emerging Markets Index that tracks
performance of emerging market equity
securities.
LVIP SSGA Emerging Markets Equity
Index Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.50%2
8.83%
2.74%
N/A
Long-term growth of capital. A fund of
funds.
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation
Managed Volatility Fund - Standard
Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.59%2
13.51%
6.28%
3.91%
To approximate as closely as practicable,
before fees and expenses, the
performance of a broad market index of
non-U.S. foreign securities.
LVIP SSGA International Index Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.39%2
17.57%
7.96%
4.02%
A-9
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP SSGA International Managed
Volatility Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.63%2
17.44%
4.94%
N/A
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP SSGA Large Cap Managed Volatility
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.47%2
24.44%
13.23%
8.91%
Seek to approximate as closely as
practicable, before fees and expenses,
the performance of a broad market index
that emphasizes stocks of mid-sized
U.S. companies.
LVIP SSGA Mid-Cap Index Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.35%2
16.05%
12.22%
N/A
To approximate as closely as practicable,
before fees and expenses, the total rate
of return of common stocks publicly
traded in the United States, as
represented by the S&P 500 Index.
LVIP SSGA S&P 500 Index Fund -
Standard Class4
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.23%
26.01%
15.41%
11.77%
To provide investment results that,
before fees and expenses, correspond
generally to the price and yield
performance of an index that tracks the
short-term U.S. corporate bond market.
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
- Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.36%2
5.17%
1.87%
N/A
To approximate as closely as practicable,
before fees and expenses, the
performance of the Russell 2000®
Index, which emphasizes stocks of small
U.S. companies.
LVIP SSGA Small-Cap Index Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.38%2
16.50%
9.52%
6.74%
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP SSGA SMID Cap Managed Volatility
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.61%2
13.69%
6.98%
4.21%
Capital appreciation. A fund of funds.
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation
Managed Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.81%2
15.80%
6.63%
N/A
High level of current income and growth
of capital, with an emphasis on growth
of capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed
Risk Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.79%2
15.02%
6.15%
N/A
Total return consistent with the
preservation of capital. A fund of funds.
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.37%
6.00%
0.59%
1.27%
Long-term capital appreciation. A fund
of funds.
LVIP Vanguard Domestic Equity ETF
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.32%2
25.22%
14.84%
11.09%
A-10
Investment Objective
Fund and
Adviser/Sub-adviser1
Current Expenses
Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
 
 
1 year
5 year
10 year
Long-term capital appreciation. A fund
of funds.
LVIP Vanguard International Equity ETF
Fund - Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.34%2
15.36%
7.11%
4.00%
Capital growth.
LVIP Wellington Capital Growth Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.70%2
38.70%
16.98%
13.91%
Maximize total return.
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund -
Standard Class
advised by Lincoln Financial Investments
Corporation
0.53%
5.93%
0.94%
N/A
To seek to provide total return through a
combination of high current income and
capital appreciation.
Macquarie VIP High Income Series -
Service Class3
(formerly Delaware Ivy VIP High Income
Portfolio)
advised by Delaware Management
Company
0.96%
11.95%
4.46%
3.70%
Growth of capital.
Macquarie VIP Mid Cap Growth Series -
Service Class3
(formerly Delaware Ivy VIP Mid Cap
Growth Portfolio)
advised by Delaware Management
Company
1.10%2
19.59%
14.63%
10.47%
Balanced investment composed of a
well-diversified portfolio of stocks and
bonds which produce both capital
growth and current income.
Putnam VT George Putnam Balanced
Fund - Class IA
0.67%
20.26%
10.71%
8.30%
Capital growth and current income.
Putnam VT Large Cap Value Fund - Class
IA
0.57%
15.92%
14.78%
10.54%
Long-term capital appreciation.
Putnam VT Sustainable Future Fund -
Class IA
0.82%2
28.83%
12.56%
8.72%
Long-term capital appreciation.
Putnam VT Sustainable Leaders Fund -
Class IA
0.65%
26.42%
16.38%
12.87%
High current income consistent with
preservation of capital; capital
appreciation is a secondary objective.
Templeton Global Bond VIP Fund - Class
1
0.50%2
3.19%
-1.89%
-0.41%
Income and capital appreciation. A fund
of funds.
TOPS® Balanced ETF Portfolio – Service
Class Shares
advised by Valmark Advisers, Inc.
0.60%
11.32%
N/A
N/A
Capital Appreciation. A fund of funds.
TOPS® Moderate Growth ETF Portfolio –
Service Class Shares
advised by Valmark Advisers, Inc.
0.59%
13.36%
N/A
N/A
1
The name of the adviser or sub-adviser is not listed if the name is incorporated into the name of the fund or the fund company.
2
This fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. As a result, this fund’s annual expenses reflect temporary expense reductions. See the fund prospectus for additional information.
3
Investments in Macquarie VIP Series, Delaware Funds, Ivy Funds, LVIP Macquarie Funds or Lincoln Life accounts managed by Macquarie Investment Management Advisers, a series of Macquarie Investments Management Business Trust, are not and will not be deposits with or liabilities of Macquarie Bank Limited ABN 46008 583 542 and its holding companies, including their subsidiaries or related companies, and are subject to investment risk, including possible delays in prepayment and loss of income and capital invested. No Macquarie Group company guarantees or will guarantee the performance of the series or funds or accounts, the repayment of capital from the series or funds or account, or any particular rate of return.
4
The Index to which this fund is managed to is a product of S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC (SPDJI) and has been licensed for use by one or more of the portfolio’s
A-11
service providers (licensee). Standard & Poor’s®, S&P®, S&P GSCI® and S&P 500® are registered trademarks of S&P Global, Inc. or its affiliates (S&P) and Dow Jones® is a registered trademark of Dow Jones Trademark Holdings LLC (Dow Jones). The trademarks have been licensed for use by SPDJI and sublicensed for certain purposes by the licensee. The licensee’s products are not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by SPDJI, Dow Jones, S&P, their respective affiliates, or their third party licensors, and none of these parties or their respective affiliates or third party licensors make any representation regarding the advisability of investing in such products, nor do they have liability for any errors, omissions, or interruptions of the Index.
5
Standard & Poor’s®,” “S&P®,” “Standard & Poor’s Equal Weight Index,” “S&P EWI,” “S&P 500®,” “Standard & Poor’s 500” and “500” are trademarks of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. and have been licensed for use by the Invesco V.I. Equally-Weighted S&P 500 Fund. The fund is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by S&P, and S&P makes no representation regarding the advisability of investing in the fund.
6
Dow Jones is a registered trademark of Dow Jones Trademark Holdings LLC (“Dow Jones”). The trademark has been licensed to S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC and has been sublicensed for use for certain purposes by First Trust Advisors L.P. The product is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor's and Standard & Poor's makes no representation regarding the advisability of purchasing the product.
A-12
Appendix B — Investment Requirements
If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be subject to Investment Requirements. This means you will be limited in your choice of Subaccount investments and in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. This also means you will not be able to allocate Contract Value to all of the Subaccounts that are available to Contractowners who have not elected a Living Benefit Rider. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider.
If you elect 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) or i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk), you must allocate your Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Requirements for Managed Risk Riders section below. If you elect any other Living Benefit Rider, you must allocate your Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit or other Living Benefit Riders section below. Currently, if you purchase i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will not be subject to any Investment Requirements, although we reserve the right to impose Investment Requirements for this rider in the future. If we do exercise our right to do so, you will have to reallocate your Contract Value subject to such requirements.
If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, Investment Requirements apply whether you purchase the rider at contract issue, or add it to an existing Contract. You must hold the rider for a minimum period of time after election (the minimum time is specified under the Termination section of each rider). During this time, you will be required to adhere to the Investment Requirements. After this time, failure to adhere to the Investment Requirements will result in termination of the rider.
Certain Living Benefit Riders guarantee you the right to transition to a version of the i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. If you transition to i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Investment Requirements under your Prior Living Benefit Rider continue to apply. See i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.
Certain of the underlying funds that are included in the Investment Requirements, including funds managed by an adviser affiliated with us, employ risk management strategies that are intended to control the funds’ overall volatility, and for some funds, to also reduce the downside exposure of the funds during significant market downturns.
These funds are included under Investment Requirements (particularly in the Investment Requirements for the Managed Risk riders) in part because the reduction in volatility helps us, to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider. At the same time, risk management strategies in periods of high market volatility or other market conditions, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance. You should consult with your financial professional to determine whether these funds align with your investment objectives. For more information about the funds and the investment strategies they employ, please refer to the funds’ current prospectuses. Fund prospectuses are available by contacting us.
We have divided the Subaccounts of your Contract into groups and have specified the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value that must be in each group at the time you purchase the rider. Some investment options are not available to you if you purchase certain riders. The Investment Requirements may not be consistent with an aggressive investment strategy. You should consult with your financial professional to determine if the Investment Requirements are consistent with your investment objectives.
You can select the percentages of Contract Value (or Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect) to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts within the group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group.
In accordance with these Investment Requirements, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option under your Contract and thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a periodic basis. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, we will rebalance your Contract Value, on a pro-rata basis, based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Any reallocation of Contract Value among the Subaccounts made by you prior to a rebalancing date will become your allocation instructions for rebalancing purposes. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. If we rebalance Contract Value from the Subaccounts and your allocation instructions do not comply with the Investment Requirements, portfolio rebalancing will be paused, and any subsequent transfer requests will be considered not in Good Order until updated allocation instructions are received. These investments will become your allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise.
We may change the list of Subaccounts in a group, change the number of groups, change the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value allowed in a group, change the investment options that are or are not available to you, or change the rebalancing frequency at any time in our sole discretion. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the subaccount investments.
B-1
At the time you receive notice of a change to the Investment Requirements, you may:
1.
submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value, before the effective date specified in the notice, so that the Investment Requirements are satisfied; or
2.
take no action and be subject to the quarterly rebalancing as described above. If this results in a change to your allocation instructions, then these will be your new allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise; or
3.
terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event, if you do not wish to be subject to these Investment Requirements.
Investment Requirements for Managed Risk Riders. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), you must currently allocate your Contract Value or Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts only. Not all funds may be available, refer to the “Description of the Funds” section of this prospectus for more information. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income Fund
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
American Funds Managed Risk Growth Fund
American Funds Managed Risk Growth-Income Fund
American Funds Managed Risk International Fund
American Funds Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP BlackRock Dividend Value Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP BlackRock Global Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP BlackRock U.S. Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Blended Mid Cap Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP ClearBridge Franklin Select Large Cap Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP Dimensional International Equity Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Equity Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP Fidelity Institutional AMSM Select Core Equity Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Invesco Select Equity Income Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Select Mid Cap Value Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP MFS International Equity Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP Multi-Manager Global Equity Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP SSGA International Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP SSGA Large Cap Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP SSGA SMID Cap Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
•
American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
•
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Preservation Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock U.S. Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income Fund
B-2
•
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation Managed Volatility Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
•
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
 
Investment Requirements for Lincoln Wealth PassSM and i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. If you elect Lincoln Wealth PassSM or i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit you must currently allocate your Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund (not available for riders elected on
or after August 21, 2017)
American Funds Mortgage Fund
American Funds The Bond Fund of America
American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Core Bond Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income Fund
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
American Funds Asset Allocation fund
American Funds Capital Income Builder®
American Funds Capital World Growth and Income Fund
American Funds Global Balanced Fund
American Funds Global Growth Fund
American Funds Growth Fund
American Funds Growth-Income Fund
American Funds High-Income Trust
American Funds International Fund
American Funds International Growth and Income Fund
American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
American Funds Washington Mutual Investors Fund
ClearBridgeVariable Large Cap Growth Portfolio
Fidelity® VIP Balanced Portfolio
Fidelity® VIP FundsManager® 50% Portfolio
First Trust Capital Strength Portfolio
First Trust Growth Strength Portfolio
First Trust International Developed Capital Strength Portfolio
First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio
Franklin Multi-Asset Variable Conservative Growth Fund
Invesco V.I. EQV International Equity Fund
Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Conservative Fund
Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Fund
Lincoln Opportunistic Hedged Equity Fund
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
LVIP American Century Capital Appreciation Fund
LVIP American Century Disciplined Core Value Fund
LVIP American Century International Fund
LVIP American Century Large Company Value Fund
LVIP American Century Mid Cap Value Fund
LVIP American Century Ultra Fund
LVIP American Century Value Fund
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Fund
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Channing Small Cap Value Fund
LVIP Dimensional International Core Equity Fund
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Core Equity 1 Fund
LVIP Dimensional U.S. Core Equity 2 Fund
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor International Equity Fund
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor Large Cap Equity Fund
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor SMID Cap Equity Fund
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Government Money Market Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Mid Cap Value Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Retirement Income Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Small Cap Core Fund
LVIP JPMorgan U.S. Equity Fund
LVIP Macquarie High Yield Fund
B-3
Group 1
Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
 
LVIP Macquarie SMID Cap Core Fund
LVIP Macquarie Wealth Builder Fund
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation Managed Volatility Fund
LVIP SSGA International Index Fund
LVIP SSGA Mid-Cap Index Fund
LVIP SSGA S&P 500 Index Fund
LVIP SSGA Small-Cap Index Fund
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
LVIP Vanguard Domestic Equity ETF Fund
LVIP Vanguard International Equity ETF Fund
LVIP Wellington Capital Growth Fund
Macquarie VIP High Income Series
Macquarie VIP Mid Cap Growth Series
Putnam VT George Putnam Balanced Fund
Putnam VT Large Cap Value Fund
Putnam VT Sustainable Future Fund
Putnam VT Sustainable Leaders Fund
TOPS® Balanced ETF Portfolio
TOPS® Moderate Growth ETF Portfolio
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
•
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund
•
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund (not available for riders elected on or after August 21, 2017)
•
American Funds Global Balanced Fund
•
American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
•
American Funds Mortgage Fund
•
American Funds The Bond Fund of America
•
American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund
•
Fidelity® VIP Balanced Portfolio
•
Fidelity® VIP FundsManager® 50% Portfolio
•
Franklin Multi-Asset Variable Conservative Growth Fund
•
Lincoln Opportunistic Hedged Equity Fund
•
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
•
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Preservation Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
•
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP JPMorgan Core Bond Fund
•
LVIP JPMorgan Retirement Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Wealth Builder Fund
•
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation Managed Volatility Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
•
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
•
Putnam VT George Putnam Balanced Fund
•
TOPS® Balanced ETF Portfolio
•
TOPS® Moderate Growth ETF Portfolio
The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
B-4
Investment Requirements for other Living Benefit Riders. If you elected a Living Benefit Rider other than 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) or i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, you must currently allocate your Contract Value or Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 
Group 1
Investments must be at least 30% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 2
Investments cannot exceed 70% of Contract
Value or Account Value
Group 3
Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract
Value or Account Value
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund
American Funds Mortgage Fund
American Funds The Bond Fund of America
American Funds U.S. Government Securities
Fund
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
LVIP American Preservation Fund
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
LVIP JPMorgan Core Bond Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income
Fund
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
Any of the Subaccounts offered under the
Contract except for funds in Groups 1 and 3,
and the fixed account or noted below.
DWS Alternative Asset Allocation VIP Portfolio
LVIP Franklin Templeton Multi-Factor Emerging
Markets Equity Fund
LVIP SSGA Emerging Markets Equity Index Fund
The ClearBridge Variable Mid Cap Portfolio, First Trust Capital Strength Hedged Equity Portfolio, Lincoln Hedged Nasdaq-100 Fund, Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Conservative Fund, Lincoln Hedged S&P 500 Fund, Lincoln Opportunistic Hedged Equity Fund, LVIP BlackRock Global Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund, LVIP BlackRock U.S. Growth ETF Allocation Managed Risk Fund, and Templeton Global Bond VIP Fund are not available. The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.
As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.
•
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund
•
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund
•
American Funds Global Balanced Fund
•
American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund
•
American Funds Mortgage Fund
•
American Funds The Bond Fund of America
•
American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund
•
Fidelity® VIP Balanced Portfolio
•
Fidelity® VIP FundsManager® Portfolio
•
Franklin Multi-Asset Conservative Growth Fund
•
LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund
•
LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Income Allocation Fund
•
LVIP American Preservation Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Global Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP BlackRock Inflation Protected Bond Fund
•
LVIP Global Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Conservative Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Global Moderate Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP JPMorgan Core Bond Fund
•
LVIP JPMorgan Retirement Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Floating Rate Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Diversified Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Limited-Term Diversified Income Fund
•
LVIP Macquarie Wealth Builder Fund
•
LVIP PIMCO Low Duration Bond Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Global Tactical Allocation Managed Volatility Fund
•
LVIP SSGA Short-Term Bond Index Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Aggressive Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP U.S. Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund
•
LVIP Vanguard Bond Allocation Fund
•
LVIP Western Asset Core Bond Fund
•
Putnam VT George Putnam Balanced Fund
•
TOPS® Balanced ETF Portfolio
•
TOPS® Moderate Growth ETF Portfolio
B-5
Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
The Living Benefit Riders described in this Appendix are no longer available. This Appendix contains important information for Contractowners who purchased their Contract and one of the following Living Benefit Riders.
Death Benefit
Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider (EEB Rider). This Death Benefit is no longer available. The amount of Death Benefit payable under this rider is the greatest of the following amounts:
•
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or
•
the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. (withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0; or
•
the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant for whom a death claim is approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is adjusted for certain transactions. It is increased by Purchase Payments made on or after that contract anniversary on which the highest Contract Value is obtained. It is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that contract anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value; or
•
the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim plus an amount equal to the enhancement rate times the lesser of:
•
the contract earnings; or
•
the covered earnings limit.
Note: If there are no contract earnings, there will not be an amount provided under this item.
The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EEB. It assumes that the oldest Contractowner or Annuitant age is 68, an initial deposit of $100,000 and an enhancement rate of 40%. 
Contract Value on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved
$120,000
Contract earnings
$20,000 ($120,000 - $100,000)
Covered earnings limit
$200,000 ($100,000 x 2)
The enhancement rate is multiplied by the lesser of the contract earnings amount ($20,000) or the
covered earnings limit amount ($200,000)
$8,000 (40% x $20,000)
Total Death Benefit amount
$128,000 ($120,000 + $8,000)
Subject to state approval, annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals up to 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year will not be considered a withdrawal under your Death Benefit calculation of the sum of all Purchase Payments or highest Contract Value. Your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal, but the value of your Death Benefit will not be negatively impacted. For Annual Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed 1.25% of your Contract Value within a Contract Year, the portion of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal over 1.25% will be treated as a withdrawal under this Death Benefit and reduce your guarantees.
The enhancement rate is based on the age of the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant on the date when the rider becomes effective. If the oldest is under age 70, the rate is 40%. If the oldest is age 70 to 75, the rate is 25%. The EEB rider is not available if the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant is age 76 or older at the time the rider would become effective.
Contract earnings equal:
•
the Contract Value as of the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved by us for payment; minus
•
the Purchase Payments as of the effective date of this rider; minus
•
each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment; plus
•
any Purchase Payment that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.
The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where
C-1
(A)
is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where
(B)
is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where
(i)
is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and
(ii)
is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.
The covered earnings limit equals 200% of:
•
the Contract Value as of the effective date of this rider (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that date); plus
•
each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, and prior to the contract anniversary immediately preceding the 76th birthday of the oldest of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant; minus
•
any contractual basis that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.
The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where
(A)
is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where
(B)
is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where
(i)
is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and
(ii)
is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.
If the EEB rider is in effect, the enhancement rate for future benefits will be based on the age of the older of the surviving spouse or the Annuitant at the time the EEB is added to the Contract. The contract earnings and the covered earnings limit will be reset, treating the current Contract Value (after crediting any Death Benefit amount into the Contract as described above) as the initial deposit for purposes of future benefit calculations. If either the surviving spouse or the surviving Annuitant is 76 or older, the EEB Death Benefit will be reduced to the EGMDB for a total annual charge of 1.85% or 1.40% depending on which Contract you purchase.
The EEB rider may not be terminated unless you surrender the Contract or the Contract is in the Annuity Payout period.
In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals and premium taxes, if any.
Charges and Deductions for Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 and 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) Fees. If you have elected a Living Benefit Rider, there is a fee associated with that rider for as long as the rider is in effect.
The protected lifetime income fee rates for the riders listed above are: 
 
Current Annual Fee Rate
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Fee Rate
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Lincoln Lifetime
IncomeSM Advantage
2.01
1.25%
(0.3125% quarterly)
1.50%
(0.3750% quarterly)
2.00%
2.00%
4LATER® Advantage
(Managed Risk) 2
1.05%
(0.2625% quarterly)
1.25%
(0.3125% quarterly)
2.00%
2.00%
 
1 Beginning February 22, 2021, the current annual fee rate for the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM 2.0 Advantage rider increased from 1.05% to 1.25% (single life option); 1.25% to 1.50% (joint life option) upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000 or (c) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. This fee increase will also occur upon a step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit following a transition to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.
C-2
2 Beginning February 20, 2024, the current annual fee rate for the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will increase from 1.05% to 1.25% (single life option; 1.25% to 1.50% (joint life option) if (a) the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary; or (b) upon the earlier of (1) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (2) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. This fee increase will also occur upon a step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit following a transition to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.
The protected lifetime income fee:
•
is based on the Protected Income Base (initial Purchase Payment if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, Account Value Step-ups, Enhancements, and as decreased for Excess Withdrawals. (The Protected Income Base is decreased by all withdrawals under 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)); and
•
may increase every Benefit Year upon an Account Value Step-up or an Enhancement. (You may opt out of this increase – see details below.)
The fee will be deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The first deduction of the fee will occur on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and fixed account, if any, of the Contract on the Valuation Date the protected lifetime income fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Protected Income Base increases or decreases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. Refer to Living Benefit Riders for a discussion and example of the impact of the changes to the Protected Income Base.
Opting Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from an Account Value Step-up
The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Protected Income Base every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. See Fee Tables. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for any additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals (or all withdrawals under 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)). This opt out will only apply for this single Account Value Step-up, and not to any subsequent Account Value Step-ups. You will need to notify us each time thereafter (if an Account Value Step-up would cause your fee rate to increase) if you do not want the Account Value Step-up.
The annual protected lifetime income fee rate will increase to the then current rate not to exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate, if after the first Benefit Year anniversary cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this protected lifetime income fee rate increase. See Living Benefit Riders.
Opting Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from an Enhancement
An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base (less Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year) occurs if a 10-year Enhancement Period is in effect (as described further in the Living Benefit Rider section). During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the protected lifetime income fee may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. Since the Enhancement could increase your Protected Income Base each Benefit Year, your fee rate could increase each Benefit Year, but the fee rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Enhancement by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your fee rate to change. If you opt out of the Enhancement, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the Enhancement, adjusted for additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals (or all withdrawals under any version of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)), if any, and the Enhancement will not be applied. This opt out will only apply for this single Enhancement and not to any subsequent Enhancements. You will need to notify us each time thereafter (if an Enhancement would cause your fee rate to increase) if you do not want the Enhancement.
To opt out of any of the events discussed above, you may contact us in writing or by telephone (if you have proper authorization for telephone transactions in place).
No Opt Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from Purchase Payments
The fee rate will also increase if, after the first Benefit Year anniversary, cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this fee rate increase.
The fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the Contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further fee will be deducted.
C-3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Contractowners who transition from a Prior Rider. If you have elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) (“Prior Rider”), you may carry over certain features of that Prior Rider to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. If you make this transition, your protected lifetime income fee of the Prior Rider will be the initial charge for your i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rider.
This charge is in addition to the daily mortality and expense risk and administrative charge of the base contract for your Death Benefit option set out under Deductions from the VAA. The charges and calculations described earlier for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will not apply. 
If your Prior Rider is...
you will transition to...
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit
(version 4)
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)
 
The initial charge is a percentage of the greater of the Protected Income Base from the Prior Rider or the Account Value. The charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted quarterly, starting with the first three-month anniversary of the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and every three months thereafter. Your base contract also applies. Contractowners are guaranteed that in the future the guaranteed maximum charge rate for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be the guaranteed maximum charge rate that was in effect at the time they purchased the Prior Rider.
The charge will not change unless there is an automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit (described later in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus). At such time, the dollar amount of the charge will increase by a two part formula: 1) the charge will increase by the same percentage that the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment increased and 2) the charge will also increase by the percentage of any increase to the protected lifetime income fee of the Prior Rider. (The Prior Rider fee rate continues to be used as a factor in determining the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge.) The charge rate is based upon surrender experience, mortality experience, Contractowner investment experience, solvency and profit margins, and the goals and objectives of the Lincoln hedging experience. Significant changes in one or more of these categories could result in an increase in the charge. This means that the charge may change annually. The charge may also be reduced if a withdrawal above the Regular Income Payment is taken. The dollar amount of the protected lifetime income fee will be reduced in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value. The annual dollar amount is divided by four (4) to determine the quarterly charge.
The following example is intended to show how the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge for purchasers of a Prior Rider could be calculated for a representative male Contractowner, as well as the impact to the charge due to increases to the Guaranteed Income Benefit and the Prior Rider fee rate. For illustration purposes, we will assume that that the example is a nonqualified contract and the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is set at 4% of the Protected Income Base based upon the Contractowner’s age (see Guaranteed Income Benefit for a more detailed description). The example also assumes that the protected lifetime income fee for the Prior Rider is 1.05% (single life option). The first example demonstrates how the initial charge rate is determined for an existing Contract with an Account Value and Protected Income Base. This calculation method applies to the purchase of any Prior Rider, except the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages and charges may vary, as set forth in the Guaranteed Income Benefit description later in this prospectus. The charges and rates shown here may be different from those that apply to your Contract. The calculation of the charge for your Contract will be based on the specific factors applicable to your Contract. 
1/1/22 Initial i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value
$100,000
1/1/22 Protected Income Base as of the last Valuation Date under the Prior Rider
$125,000
1/1/22 Initial Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($125,000 x 1.05%) the protected lifetime
income fee for the Prior Rider is assessed against the Protected Income Base since it is larger than the Account Value
$1,312.50
1/2/22 Amount of initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (an example of how the Regular Income Payment
is calculated is shown in the SAI)
$5,051
1/2/22 Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4% x $125,000 Protected Income Base)
$5,000
The next example shows how Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($1,312.50 x ($5,175/$5,000)) Prior charge x [ratio of increased Guaranteed Income Benefit to prior Guaranteed the charge will increase if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped up to 75% of the Regular Income Payment. 
C-4
1/2/23 Recalculated Regular Income Payment (due to market gain in Account Value)
$6,900
1/2/23 New Guaranteed Income Benefit (75% x $6,900 Regular Income Payment)
$5,175
1/2/23 Income Benefit]
$1,358.44
Continuing the above example: 
1/2/23 Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit
$1,358.44
1/2/24 Recalculated Regular Income Payment (due to Account Value increase)
$7,400
1/2/24 New Guaranteed Income Benefit (75% x $7,400 Regular Income Payment)
$5,550
Assume the Prior Rider charge rate increases from 1.05% to 1.15%.
1/2/24 Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($1,358.44 x ($5,550/$5,175) x
(1.15%/1.05%))
$1,595.63
The new annual charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is $1,595.63 which is equal to the current annual charge of $1,358.44 multiplied by the percentage increase of the Guaranteed Income Benefit ($5,550/$5,175) and then multiplied by the percentage increase to the Prior Rider protected lifetime income fee (1.15%/1.05%).
If the fee rate of your Prior Rider is increased, we will notify you in writing. You may contact us in writing or at the telephone number listed on the first page of this prospectus to reverse the step-up within 30 days after the date on which the step-up occurred. If we receive this notice, we will decrease the charge rate, on a going forward basis, to the charge rate in effect before the step-up occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit increased due to the step-up we would decrease the Guaranteed Income Benefit to the Guaranteed Income Benefit in effect before the step-up occurred, reduced by any additional withdrawals. Future step-ups as described in the rider would continue.
After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, i4LIFE® Advantage will also be terminated and the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge will cease.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage Charge. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate is listed in the following tables.
1.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage 5 Year Elective Step-up option – The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the next election of a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount. 
 
Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021
0.95%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021
0.85%
January 20, 2009 through December 2, 2012
0.65%
Prior to January 20, 2009
0.45%
2.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up (including the prior versions of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up, single life only) – The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the automatic or elected step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. 
 
Current Fee
 
Single
Life
Joint
Life
Beginning January 11, 2021
1.00%
1.25%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021
0.85%
1.00%
Prior to December 3, 2012
0.65%
0.80%
The charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount (initial Purchase Payment if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and step-ups and decreased for withdrawals. We will deduct the cost of this rider from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the effective date of the rider. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and any fixed account of the Contract on the Valuation Date the rider charge is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Guaranteed Amount increases or decreases, because the charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount. Refer to Living Benefit Riders C – Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – Guaranteed Amount for a discussion and example of the impact of changes to the Guaranteed Amount.
C-5
Under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step-up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary up to and including the 10th Benefit Year if conditions are met as described in the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage section. Additional 10-year periods of step-ups may be elected. The annual rider charge rate will not change upon each automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Amount within the 10-year period.
If you elect to step-up the Guaranteed Amount for another 10-year step-up period (including if we administer the step-up election for you or if you make a change from a joint life to a single life option after a death or divorce), a portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days prior to the step-up, will be deducted on the Valuation Date of the step-up based on the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the step-up. This deduction covers the cost of the rider from the time of the previous deduction to the date of the step-up. After a Contractowner's step-up, we will deduct the rider charge for the stepped-up Guaranteed Amount on a quarterly basis, beginning on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the step-up. At the time of the elected step-up, the rider charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed), but it will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of the Guaranteed Amount. If you never elect to step-up your Guaranteed Amount, your rider charge rate will never change, although the amount we deduct will change as the Guaranteed Amount changes. The rider charge will be discontinued upon the earlier of the Annuity Commencement Date, election of i4LIFE® Advantage or termination of the rider. A portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except upon death) or surrender of the Contract.
Lincoln Wealth PassSM Fee. If you have elected Lincoln Wealth PassSM, you will pay a fee for the rider as long as the rider is in effect. The fee rate is based on the age of the covered life on the rider effective date, multiplied by the protected lifetime income fee base, which is equal to the initial Protected Amount, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and decreased for Excess Withdrawals.
The protected lifetime income fee rates for new rider elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the current rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time in our sole discretion and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.
Any change to the protected lifetime income fee rate will be disclosed in a new rate sheet at least ten days before that rate becomes effective. Current Rate Sheets will be included with this prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-877-534-8255.
The protected lifetime income fee will be deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and the fixed account, if any, on the Valuation Date the fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the protected lifetime income fee base increases or decreases.
After five years from the rider effective date, the protected lifetime income fee rate may increase annually on the Benefit Year anniversary at Lincoln’s sole discretion, up to the stated guaranteed maximum fee rate.
The protected lifetime income fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the Contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further fee will be deducted.
Discontinued Living Benefit Riders
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 is no longer available for purchase.
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 is a Living Benefit Rider that provides:
•
Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you (and your spouse if the joint life option is selected) up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a Protected Income Base;
•
A 5% Enhancement to the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;
•
Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement; and
•
Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).
Protected Annual Income payments are available after the younger of you or your spouse (joint life option) reach after age 55 and are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base. The specified withdrawal percentages of the Protected Income Base
C-6
are age based and may increase over time. You may receive Protected Annual Income payments for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse if the joint life option is chosen.
Please note any withdrawals made prior to age 55 or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. Additionally, Advisory Fee Withdrawals that exceed the Advisory Fee withdrawal percentage and the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are also considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base as well as your Protected Annual Income amount by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero. Withdrawals, including the portion of cumulative Advisory Fee Withdrawals over 1.25%, will also negatively impact the availability of the 5% Enhancement.
The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.
Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.
Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Income Base is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The initial Protected Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment increased by subsequent Purchase Payments and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life Contracts (or Contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.
Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Income Base (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base) by the amount of the Purchase Payment. For example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Income Base by $10,000. Any Purchase Payment made after the initial Purchase Payment will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating the 5% Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Protected Income Base for purposes of calculating the 5% Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.
After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. If after the first Benefit Year cumulative additional Purchase Payments equal or exceed $100,000, the rider charge will change to the then current charge in effect on the next Benefit Year anniversary. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason including market loss. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed after the Nursing Home Enhancement is requested and approved by us (as described later in this prospectus).
Excess Withdrawals, including cumulative Advisory Fee Withdrawals in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value for that Contract Year, reduce the Protected Income Base as discussed below. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base.
Since the charge for the rider is based on the Protected Income Base, the cost of the rider increases when additional Purchase Payments, Account Value Step-ups and 5% Enhancements are made, and the cost decreases as Excess Withdrawals are made because these transactions all adjust the Protected Income Base. In addition, the charge rate may change when Account Value Step-ups or 5% Enhancements occur as discussed below or additional Purchase Payments occur. See Charges and Other Deductions – Rider Charges.
5% Enhancement. You are eligible for a 5% Enhancement for at least 10 years from the effective date of your rider. On each Benefit Year anniversary during an Enhancement Period, the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5% if:
a. the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under age 86;
b. there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year, including cumulative Advisory Fee Withdrawals in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value for that Contract Year; and
c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period described below.
C-7
The original Enhancement Period is up to a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the 5% Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs.
If you decline an Account Value Step-up during the Enhancement Period, you will continue to be eligible for the 5% Enhancements as long as you meet the conditions listed above. You may not opt out of the Account Value Step-up if an additional Purchase Payment made during that Benefit Year caused the charge for the rider to increase to the current charge.
Note: The 5% Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment or an Advisory Fee Withdrawal in excess of the Advisory Fee Withdrawal percentage) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the 5% Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05).
Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 = $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000
This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the enhancement on the first Benefit year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider. It will not be eligible for the 5% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).
As explained below, the 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal or greater than what the 5% Enhancement provides, you will not receive the 5% Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the enhancement would not apply. The 5% Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the 5% Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.
Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base will automatically step-up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:
a.
the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and
b.
the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including the rider charge and Advisory Fee Withdrawals in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value), plus any Purchase Payments made on that date is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement (if any).
Each time the Protected Income Base is stepped up to the current Contract Value as described above, your charge rate for the rider will be the current charge rate for the rider, not to exceed the guaranteed maximum charge rate. Therefore, your charge rate for this rider could increase every Benefit Year anniversary. See Charges and Other Deductions – Rider Charges.
Each time the Account Value Step-up occurs a new Enhancement Period starts. The Account Value Step-up is available even in years when a withdrawal has occurred.
If you decline an Account Value Step-up during the first ten Benefit Years, you will continue to be eligible for the 5% Enhancements through the end of the original Enhancement Period. You may not opt out of the Account Value Step-up if an additional Purchase Payment made during that Benefit Year caused the charge for the rider to increase to the current charge.
Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the 5% Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base and the potential for the charge to increase or decrease (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments): 
C-8
 
Contract
Value
Protected Income Base with
5% Enhancement
Protected Income Base
Potential
for Charge
to Change
Initial Purchase Payment
$50,000
$50,000
N/A
$50,000
N/A
1st Benefit Year
anniversary
$54,000
$52,500
$54,000
Yes
2nd Benefit Year
anniversary
$53,900
$56,700
$56,700
No
3rd Benefit Year
anniversary
$56,000
$59,535
$59,535
No
4th Benefit Year
anniversary
$64,000
$62,512
$64,000
Yes
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). On the third Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $56,700 = $2,835). On the fourth Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value was greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,977 (5% of $59,535). An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available when you (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life option) are age 55 or older. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option). In addition to the Protected Annual Income amount, you may take Advisory Fee Withdrawals of up to 1.25% of your Contract Value annually without that withdrawal being considered a withdrawal under your Living Benefit Rider. Certain states and certain advisory firms may not allow withdrawals to pay advisory fees so please check with your financial professional. The portion of any Advisory Fee Withdrawal in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value will reduce the amount of available Protected Annual Income each year and will be considered a withdrawal.
The initial Protected Annual Income amount is calculated when you purchase the rider. If you (or younger of you and your spouse if the joint life option is elected) are under age 55 at the time the rider is elected the initial Protected Annual Income amount will be zero. If you (or the younger of you and your spouse if the joint life option is elected) are age 55 or older at the time the rider is elected the initial Protected Annual Income amount will be equal to a specified percentage of the Protected Income Base. Upon your first withdrawal the Protected Annual Income rate is based on your age (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse’s age (joint life option) at the time of the withdrawal. For example, if you purchase Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 at age 60 (single life option), your Protected Annual Income rate is 4% (see the table below). If you waited until you were age 65 (single life option) to make your first withdrawal your Protected Annual Income rate would be 5%. During the first Benefit Year, the Protected Annual Income amount is calculated using the Protected Income Base as of the effective date of the rider (including any Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider). After the first Benefit Year anniversary we will use the Protected Income Base calculated on the most recent Benefit Year anniversary for calculating the Protected Annual Income amount. After your first withdrawal the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year.
If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, withdrawals equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will continue automatically for your life (and your spouse’s life if applicable) under the Protected Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base in a lump sum. You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal the rider will terminate.
Withdrawals equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value.
The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount affect the Protected Income Base and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 4% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000: 
C-9
Contract Value on the rider's effective date
$200,000
Protected Income Base on the rider's effective date
$200,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider's effective
date ($200,000 x 4%)
$8,000
Contract Value six months after rider's effective date
$210,000
Protected Income Base six months after rider's effective date
$200,000
Withdrawal six months after rider's effective date
$8,000
Contract Value after withdrawal ($210,000 - $8,000)
$202,000
Protected Income Base after withdrawal ($200,000 - $0)
$200,000
Contract Value on first Benefit Year anniversary
$205,000
Protected Income Base on first Benefit Year anniversary
$205,000
Protected Annual Income amount on first Benefit Year anniversary
($205,000 x 4%)
$8,200
Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, the 5% Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $205,000. On the first anniversary of the rider’s effective date, the Protected Annual Income amount is $8,200 (4% x $205,000).
Purchase Payments added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual Income amount of $2,000 (4% of $50,000 Protected Income Base), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $2,400 ($2,000 + 4% 0f $10,000). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract.
5% Enhancements and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount after the Protected Income Base is adjusted either by a 5% Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate.
Nursing Home Enhancement. (The Nursing Home Enhancement is not available in certain states. Please contact the Home Office or your financial professional regarding availability.) The Protected Annual Income rate will be increased to 10%, called the Nursing Home Enhancement, during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 70 or older, or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 70 or older (joint life option), and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 elections prior to May 20, 2013, the Nursing Home Enhancement is available when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 65 or older or the youngest of the Contractowner and spouse is age 65 or older (joint life option), and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. (The Nursing Home Enhancement is not available until the next Benefit Year anniversary after age 70 (or 65 for rider elections prior to May 20, 2013) if a withdrawal has been taken since the rider effective date.) The Nursing Home Enhancement applies if the admittance into such facility occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider, the individual was not in the nursing home in the year prior to the effective date of the rider, and upon entering the nursing home, the person has then been confined for at least 90 consecutive days. For the joint life option if both spouses qualify, the Nursing Home Enhancement is available for either spouse, but not both spouses. You should carefully consider the fact that the enhanced Protected Annual Income rate is only available for one measuring life before an election is made. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 elections on and after January 20, 2015, the Nursing Home Enhancement will not be available if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, including withdrawals, market performance, or rider charges.
You may request the Nursing Home Enhancement by filling out a request form provided by us. Proof of nursing home confinement will be required each year. If you leave the nursing home, or for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 elections on and after January 20, 2015, if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the amount you would otherwise be eligible to receive. Any withdrawals made prior to the entrance into a nursing home and during the Benefit Year that the Nursing Home Enhancement commences, will reduce the amount available that year for the Nursing Home Enhancement. Purchase Payments may not be made into the Contract after a request for the Nursing Home Enhancement is approved by us and any Purchase Payments made either in the 12 months prior to entering the nursing home or while you are residing in a nursing home will not be included in the calculation of the Nursing Home Enhancement.
The requirements of an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility are set forth in the Nursing Home Enhancement Claim Form. The criteria for the facility include, but are not limited to: providing 24 hour a day nursing services; an available physician; an employed nurse on duty or call at all times; maintains daily clinical records; and able to dispense medications. This does not include an assisted living or similar facility. The admittance to a nursing home must be pursuant to a plan of care provided by a licensed health care practitioner, and the nursing home must be located in the United States. The remaining references to the Protected Annual Income amount also include the Nursing Home Enhancement amount.
C-10
Contractowners in South Dakota who elect Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 have the option to increase the Protected Annual Income rate upon the diagnosis of a terminal illness, subject to certain conditions. The Protected Annual Income amount will be increased to 10% during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 70 or older or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 70 or older (joint life option), and one is diagnosed by a licensed physician that his or her life expectancy is twelve months or less. (The terminal illness provision is not available until the next Benefit Year anniversary after age 70 (or 65 for rider elections prior to May 20, 2013) if a withdrawal has been taken since the rider effective date.) This provision applies if the diagnosis of terminal illness occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider and the diagnosis was not made in the year prior to the effective date of the rider. For the joint life option if both spouses qualify, this provision for terminal illness is available for either spouse, but not both spouses. You should carefully consider the fact that the enhanced Protected Annual Income rate is only available for one measuring life before an election is made. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 elections on and after January 20, 2015, the terminal illness provision will not be available if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, including withdrawals, market performance, or rider charges.
Once either the Nursing Home Enhancement or the terminal illness enhancement is elected for one spouse, neither enhancement will be available for the other spouse. You may request the terminal illness enhancement by filling out a request form provided by us. For elections of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0, on and after January 20, 2015, if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the amount you would otherwise be eligible to receive. Any withdrawals made prior to the diagnosis of a terminal illness and during the Benefit Year that the terminal illness enhancement commences will reduce the amount available that year for the terminal illness enhancement. Purchase Payments may not be made into the Contract after a request for the terminal illness enhancement is approved by us and any Purchase Payments made either in the 12 months prior to the terminal illness diagnosis or during the duration of the terminal illness will not be included in the calculation of the terminal illness enhancement. Any requirements to qualify for the terminal illness enhancement are set forth in the Terminal Illness Claim Form. The remaining references to the Protected Annual Income amount also include the terminal illness enhancement amount for Contractowners in South Dakota only.
Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:
1.
the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;
2.
withdrawals made prior to age 55 (younger of you or your spouse for joint life); or
3.
withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.
Advisory Fee Withdrawals made prior to age 55, or that exceed the Advisory Fee Withdrawal percentage or the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals.
When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:
1.
The Protected Income Base is reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and
2.
The Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).
Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your financial professional or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have questions about Excess Withdrawals.
The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, the Protected Annual Income amount and the Contract Value. The example assumes that the Contractowner makes a $12,000 withdrawal, which causes a $12,915 reduction in the Protected Income Base.
Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,400 (4% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)
After a $12,000 Withdrawal ($3,400 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $8,600 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $3,400 and the Protected Income Base is not reduced:
Contract Value = $56,600 ($60,000 - $3,400)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
The Contract Value is also reduced by the $8,600 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base is reduced by 15.19435%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $56,600 Contract Value ($8,600 ÷ $56,600)
C-11
Contract Value = $48,000 ($56,600 - $8,600)
Protected Income Base = $72,084.81 ($85,000 x 15.19435% = $12,915.19; $85,000 - $12,915.19 = $72,084.81)
Protected Annual Income amount = $2,883.39 (4% of $72,084.81 Protected Income Base)
On the following Benefit Year anniversary the Contract Value has been reduced due to a declining market, but the Protected Income Base is unchanged:
Contract Value = $43,000
Protected Income Base = $72,084.81
Protected Annual Income amount = $2,883.39 (4% x $72,084.81)
In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base as well as your Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal the rider will terminate.
Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:
1.
Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;
2.
The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;
3.
No withdrawals other than RMDs are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);
4. This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and
5. No withdrawals are made before age 55 (the younger of you or your spouse).
If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to RMDs, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.
Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.
Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“PAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner (and joint life if applicable) will receive annuity payments equal to the Guaranteed Annual Income amount for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive the PAIPO.
Contractowners may decide to choose the Protected Annual Income Payout Option over i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit if they feel this may provide a higher final payment over time and they may place more importance on this payment over access to the Account Value. Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option.
If you are receiving the Protected Annual Income Payout Option, the Beneficiary may be eligible to receive final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. If the Account Value Death Benefit option was in effect immediately prior to electing the PAIPO, the Beneficiary will not be eligible to receive the final payment. The final payment is a one-time lump-sum payment. If the effective date of the rider is the same as the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals. If the effective date of the rider is after the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased for Purchase Payments received after the rider effective date and decreased by withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals reduce the final payment in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the PAIPO will reduce the final payment dollar for dollar.
Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base or any other Death Benefit upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln Lifetime
C-12
IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts - Death Benefit.
Upon the death of the single life, this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). If the Beneficiary elects to continue the Contract after the death of the single life (through a separate provision of the Contract), the Beneficiary may purchase a new Living Benefit Rider, if available, under the terms and charge in effect at the time of the new purchase. There is no carryover of the Protected Income Base.
Upon the first death under the joint life option, withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount continue to be available for the life of the surviving spouse. The 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue if applicable as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).
As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse, if under age 86, may choose to terminate the joint life option and purchase a new single life option, if available, under the terms and charge in effect at the time for a new purchase. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider whether the change will cause the Protected Income Base and the Protected Annual Income amount to decrease.
Termination. After the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Contractowners in Florida who elect their rider on or after January 20, 2015 and prior to February 20, 2018, may terminate the rider after the first anniversary of the effective date of the rider. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 will automatically terminate:
•
on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option will continue if applicable);
•
if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including the sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;
•
upon the death under the single life option or the death of the surviving spouse under the joint life option;
•
when the Protected Annual Income amount or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;
•
on the date the Contractowner is changed due to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or
•
upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.
The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit option. Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may decide later to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This transition must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage
The Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage rider is no longer available for purchase.
This benefit provides a minimum guaranteed amount (Guaranteed Amount) that you will be able to withdraw, in installments, from your Contract. The Guaranteed Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment (or Contract Value if elected after contract issue) adjusted for subsequent Purchase Payments, step-ups and withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below.
With Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value, if higher, on each Benefit Year anniversary through the 10th anniversary. With Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, the Contractowner can also initiate additional 10-year periods of automatic step-ups.
You may access this Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals which are based on a percentage of the Guaranteed Amount. With Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage single life or joint life options, you also have the option to receive periodic withdrawals for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse. These options are discussed below in detail.
If you purchased this rider, you are limited in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements.
If the benefit was elected at contract issue, then the rider was effective on the Contract’s effective date. If the benefit was elected after the Contract was issued, the rider was effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us.
Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If the Contractowner elects to step up the Guaranteed Amount (this does not include Automatic
C-13
Annual Step-ups within a 10-year period), the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the effective date of the step-up after that. The step-up will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the step-up is approved by us. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.
Guaranteed Amount. The Guaranteed Amount is a value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under this rider. The Guaranteed Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Guaranteed Amount varies based on when and how you elect the benefit. If you elected the benefit at the time you purchased the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals your initial Purchase Payment. If you elected the benefit after we issued the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The maximum Guaranteed Amount is $10 million for Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage. This maximum takes into consideration the combined guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.
Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the Purchase Payment (not to exceed the maximum); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment will increase the Guaranteed Amount by $10,000. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero.
Each withdrawal reduces the Guaranteed Amount as discussed below.
Since the charge for the rider is based on the Guaranteed Amount, the cost of the rider increases when additional Purchase Payments and step-ups are made, and the cost decreases as withdrawals are made because these transactions all adjust the Guaranteed Amount.
Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount. Under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary up to and including the 10th Benefit Year if:
a.
the Contractowner or joint owner is still living; and
b.
the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including Interest Adjustments) and the rider charge plus any Purchase Payments made on that date is greater than the Guaranteed Amount immediately preceding the Valuation Date.
After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, you may initiate another 10-year period of automatic step-ups by electing (in writing) to step up the Guaranteed Amount to the greater of the Contract Value or the current Guaranteed Amount if:
a.
each Contractowner and Annuitant is under age 81; and
b.
the Contractowner or joint owner is still living.
If you choose, we will administer this election for you automatically, so that a new 10-year period of step-ups will begin at the end of each prior 10-year step-up period.
Following is an example of how the step-ups work in Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments): 
 
Contract
Value
Guaranteed
Amount
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000
$50,000
$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary
$54,000
$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary
$53,900
$54,000
3rd Benefit Year anniversary
$57,000
$57,000
Annual step-ups, if the conditions are met, will continue until (and including) the tenth Benefit Year anniversary. If you had elected to have the next 10-year period of step-ups begin automatically after the prior 10-year period, annual step-ups, if conditions are met, will continue beginning on the eleventh Benefit Year anniversary.
Contractowner elected step-ups (other than automatic step-ups) will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive your request and a new Benefit Year will begin. Purchase Payments and withdrawals made after a step-up adjust the Guaranteed Amount. In the future, we may limit your right to step up the Guaranteed Amount to your Benefit Year anniversary dates. All step-ups are subject to the maximum Guaranteed Amount.
A Contractowner elected step-up (including Contractowner step-ups that we administer for you to begin a new 10-year step-up period) may cause a change in the charge rate for this benefit. There is no change in the charge rate when automatic, annual step-ups occur during a 10-year period.
C-14
Withdrawals. You will have access to your Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount each Benefit Year until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.
On the effective date of the rider, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is 5% of the Guaranteed Amount.
If you do not withdraw the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the extra amount into the next Benefit Year. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is increased by 5% of any additional Purchase Payments. For example, if the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $2,500 (5% of $50,000 Guaranteed Amount) is in effect and an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 is made, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $3,000 ($2,500 + 5% of $10,000). Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount (both automatic step-ups and step-ups elected by you) will step up the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to the greater of:
a.
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the step-up; or
b.
5% of the new (stepped up) Guaranteed Amount.
If the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) are within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, then:
1.
the withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the withdrawal on a dollar-for-dollar basis; and
2.
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will remain the same.
Withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount are not subject to the Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account if applicable. See The Contracts — Fixed Side of the Contract.
Withdrawals from IRA contracts will be treated as within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount (even if they exceed the 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount) only if:
•
Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal services is used to calculate the RMD;
•
The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;
•
No withdrawals other than RMDs are made within the Benefit Year; and
•
This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA.
Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.
When cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount:
1.
The Guaranteed Amount is reduced to the lesser of:
•
the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or
•
the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal.
2.
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be the lesser of:
•
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the withdrawal; or
•
the greater of:
•
5% of the reduced Guaranteed Amount immediately following the withdrawal (as specified above when withdrawals exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount); or
•
5% of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or
•
the new Guaranteed Amount.
The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A $7,000 Excess Withdrawal caused a $32,000 reduction in the Guaranteed Amount.
Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Guaranteed Amount = $85,000
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $5,000 (5% of the initial Guaranteed Amount of $100,000)
After a $7,000 Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $53,000
Guaranteed Amount = $53,000
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $2,650
The Guaranteed Amount was reduced to the lesser of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal ($53,000) or the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal ($85,000 - $7,000 = $78,000).
C-15
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount was reduced to the lesser of:
1.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount prior to the withdrawal ($5,000); or
2.
The greater of 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount ($2,650) or 5% of the Contract Value following the withdrawal ($2,650); or
3.
The new Guaranteed Amount ($53,000).
The lesser of these three items is $2,650.
In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may substantially deplete or eliminate your Guaranteed Amount and reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount.
Excess Withdrawals will be subject to an Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account. Refer to the Statement of Additional Information for an example of the Interest Adjustment calculation.
Lifetime Withdrawals. Payment of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be guaranteed for your (Contractowner) lifetime (single life option) or for the lifetimes of you (Contractowner) and your spouse (joint life option), as long as:
1.
No withdrawals are made before you (and your spouse if a joint life) are age 65; and
2.
An Excess Withdrawal (described above) has not reduced the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to zero.
If the lifetime withdrawal is not in effect, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will last only until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.
If any withdrawal is made prior to the time you (or both spouses) are age 65, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will not last for the lifetime(s), except in the two situations described below:
1.
If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 causes the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to equal or increase from the immediately prior Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. This typically occurs if the Contract Value equals or exceeds the highest, prior Guaranteed Amount. If this happens, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will automatically be available for the specified lifetime(s); or
2.
The Contractowner makes a one-time election to reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount. This reset will occur on the first valuation date following the Benefit Year anniversary and will be based on the Guaranteed Amount as of that Valuation Date. This will reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A Contractowner would only choose this if the above situation did not occur. To reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, the following must occur:
a.
the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) is age 65;
b.
the Contract is currently within a 10-year automatic step-up period described above (or else a Contractowner submits a step-up request to start a new 10-year automatic step-up period) (the Contractowner must be eligible to elect a step-up; i.e., all Contractowners and the Annuitant must be alive and under age 81); and
c.
you have submitted this request to us in writing at least 30 days prior to the end of the Benefit Year.
As an example of these two situations, if you purchased Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage single life with $100,000, your initial Guaranteed Amount is $100,000 and your initial Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $5,000. If you make a $5,000 withdrawal at age 62, your Guaranteed Amount will decrease to $95,000. Since you did not satisfy the age 65 requirement, you do not have a lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 (either automatic or Contractowner-elected) causes the Guaranteed Amount to equal or exceed $100,000, then the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount of $5,000 (or greater) will become a lifetime payout. This is the first situation described above. However, if the Guaranteed Amount has not been reset to equal or exceed the highest prior Guaranteed Amount, then you can choose the second situation described above if you are age 65 and the Contract is within a 10-year automatic step-up period. This will reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount; 5% of $95,000 is $4,750. This is your new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount which can be paid for your lifetime unless Excess Withdrawals are made.
The tax consequences of withdrawals and annuity payments are discussed in Federal Tax Matters.
All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, will decrease your Contract Value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contractowner will receive the Contract Value (less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes) and not the Guaranteed Amount.
If your Contract Value is reduced to zero because of market performance, withdrawals equal to the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will resume and continue for the life of you (and your spouse if applicable) if the lifetime withdrawals are in effect. If not, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero. You may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum.
C-16
Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option. If you desire to annuitize your Guaranteed Amount, the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is available.
The Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is a fixed annuitization in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive the Guaranteed Amount in annual annuity payments equal to the current 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, including the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawals if in effect (this option is different from other annuity payment options discussed in this prospectus, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value). Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. Payments will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero and may continue until death if the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect. This may result in a partial, final payment. You would consider this option only if your Contract Value is less than the Guaranteed Amount (and you don't believe the Contract Value will ever exceed the Guaranteed Amount) and you do not wish to keep your annuity contract in force other than to pay out the Guaranteed Amount. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.
If the Contract Value is zero and you have a remaining Guaranteed Amount, you may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum, but must elect the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option.
Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage has no provision for a lump sum payout of the Guaranteed Amount upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid other than any applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts - Death Benefit.
Upon the death of the single life under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage single life option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will end. If the Contract is continued as discussed below, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero. In the alternative, the surviving spouse can choose to become the new single life, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. The surviving spouse will need to be 65 before taking withdrawals to qualify for a lifetime payout. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider:
1.
the change a reset would cause to the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount;
2.
whether it is important to have Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for life or only until the Guaranteed Amount is reduced to zero; and
3.
the cost of the single life option.
Upon the first death under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage joint life option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will continue for the life of the surviving spouse. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will end. However, if the spouse's Beneficiary elects to take the annuity Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero (see below for a non-spouse Beneficiary). As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse may choose to change from the joint life option to the single life option, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider:
1.
if the reset will cause the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to decrease; and
2.
if the cost of the single life option is less than the cost of the joint life option.
If the surviving spouse of the deceased Contractowner continues the Contract, the remaining automatic step-ups will apply to the spouse as the new Contractowner.
If a non-spouse Beneficiary elects to receive the Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy (thereby keeping the Contract in force), the Beneficiary may continue Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage if desired. Automatic step-ups under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage will not continue and elective step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount under both options will not be permitted. In the event the Contract Value declines below the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted for withdrawals of Death Benefit payments), the Beneficiary is assured of receiving payments equal to the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted). Deductions for the rider charge will continue on a quarterly basis and will be charged against the remaining Guaranteed Amount. Note: there are instances where the required installments of the Death Benefit, in order to be in compliance with the Internal Revenue Code as noted above, may exceed the Maximum Annual
C-17
Withdrawal amount, thereby reducing the benefit of this rider. If there are multiple Beneficiaries, each Beneficiary will be entitled to continue a share of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage equal to his or her share of the Death Benefit.
Impact of Divorce on Joint Life Option. In the event of a divorce, the Contractowner may change from a joint life option to a single life option (if available) (if the Contractowner is under age 81) at the current rider charge of the single life option. At the time of the change, the Guaranteed Amount will be reset to the current Contract Value and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will equal 5% of this new Guaranteed Amount.
After a divorce, the Contractowner may keep the joint life option to have the opportunity to receive lifetime payouts for the lives of the Contractowner and a new spouse. This is only available if no withdrawals were made from the Contract after the effective date of the rider up to and including the date the new spouse is added to the rider.
Termination. After the later of the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the effective date of the rider or the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the most recent Contractowner-elected step-up, including any step-up we administered for you, of the Guaranteed Amount, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. After this time, the rider will also terminate if the Contractowner fails to adhere to the Investment Requirements. Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage will automatically terminate:
•
on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option will continue if applicable);
•
upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage;
•
if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;
•
upon the last payment of the Guaranteed Amount unless the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect;
•
when the Maximum Annual Withdrawal or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal; or
•
upon termination of the underlying annuity contract.
The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Guaranteed Amount. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate.
If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can purchase any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may decide to later carry over their Guaranteed Amount to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. The charge (see Expense Table B), Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages, Access Period requirements, and Investment Requirements will be those that currently apply to new elections of i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. This decision must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time.
Lincoln Wealth PassSM
Lincoln Wealth PassSM was designed for a Beneficiary with Death Benefit proceeds from another nonqualified contract, or from a qualified (IRA and Roth IRA) contract or qualified retirement plan if the original Contractowner died on or before December 31, 2019. This rider provides guaranteed periodic withdrawals from a benefit base called the Protected Amount (described in detail below). As long as there is a Protected Amount, you will be able to make annual withdrawals called the Protected Annual Income. The Protected Annual Income is equal to the greater of (a) or (b), where:
(a) is an amount less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income; or
(b) is an amount from a qualified or nonqualified contract that is the result of systematic installments withdrawn via an automatic withdrawal service of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) or life expectancy payment rules for the Contract Value of the Contract to which this rider is attached.
Please note any withdrawals that exceed the greater of (a) or (b) or the amounts payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Amount as well as your Protected Annual Income amount by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal. Your rider will terminate if the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.
Withdrawals equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Annual Income amount. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value.
The Contractowner or Annuitant may not be changed while this rider is in effect, including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.
Distributions must be based on the Contractowner’s life expectancy.
C-18
Contractowners age 70 or younger must elect the rider no later than 5 years after the death (if distributions have already begun, or within the time frames listed in (1) and (2) above). Contractowners ages 71 through 80 must elect the rider before beginning life expectancy Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”).
Note: Beneficiaries under the age of majority in your state will not be able to receive proceeds outright. Check your state law to see if a custodian or guardian is needed.
This rider is not available to a Beneficiary of an existing Contract if the Contract was previously annuitized, including i4LIFE® Advantage on nonqualified contracts. A trust beneficiary of a qualified Lincoln contract who chooses to assume ownership of the Contract is not eligible to elect this rider, but instead must purchase a new Contract to elect it. Non-natural beneficiaries of nonqualified contract are not eligible to purchase this rider. No other Living Benefit Riders are available if this rider is elected. Additionally, you cannot terminate this rider until after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary.
We reserve the right to discontinue offering this rider at any time, at our sole discretion, upon advanced written notice to you. This means that there is a chance you may not be able to elect it in the future. We may also make changes to, or discontinue offering, any features for future rider elections at any time at our sole discretion.
Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.
Protected Amount. The Protected Amount is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount and is the total amount of guaranteed payments you can receive. The Protected Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Amount varies based on when you elect the rider. If the rider was elected at the time of application, the Protected Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the rider was elected after we issued the Contract, the Protected Amount equals the Contract Value on the rider effective date. The maximum Protected Amount is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you are the covered lives.
Additional Purchase Payments are allowed only if additional Purchase Payments must be received by the earlier of 180 days of the rider effective date or the date required to begin minimum distributions. The source of the Purchase Payments must be from a contract that is the same market type as the Lincoln annuity. That means that if the source contract is a tax qualified (from an IRA or Roth IRA), the Purchase Payment can only be made to a qualified Lincoln contract. If the source contract is nonqualified, the Purchase Payment can only be made to a nonqualified Lincoln contract. If you are making Purchase Payments from more than one source contract, each of the source contracts must have the same decedent and the same Beneficiary. Additional Purchase Payments are not allowed if the rider is purchased by the Beneficiary who inherits an existing Lincoln annuity who chooses to continue the Contract as Contractowner.
Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Amount (not to exceed the maximum Protected Amount) by the amount of the Purchase Payment; for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Amount by $10,000. Additional Purchase Payment will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero.
Certain withdrawals will reduce the Protected Amount on a dollar for dollar basis:
•
Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount;
•
Withdrawals, using Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service, equal to RMD life expectancy payouts calculated by us for qualified contracts; or
•
Withdrawals, using Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service, equal to RMD life expectancy payouts calculated by us for nonqualified contracts.
All other withdrawals are Excess Withdrawals that reduce the Protected Amount by the same proportion that the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value. The rider will terminate when the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.
Protected Annual Income Withdrawal. The Protected Annual Income is an amount that may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year as long as there is a Protected Amount.
The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Amount by the applicable rate, based on your age on the latest date to begin withdrawals to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy or the date that the Contract Value is reduced to zero. Thereafter, the Protected Annual Income rate will not change. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon additional Purchase Payments and Excess Withdrawals, as described below. Once the Protected Amount is less than the Protected Annual Income, the Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the Protected Amount for the final year’s payment.
The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors. Generally, the rates may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Protected
C-19
Annual Income rates for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Protected Annual Income rates will not change as a result.
The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.
Any changes to the Protected Annual Income rates will be disclosed in a new Rate Sheet at least 10 days before those rates become effective. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-877-534-8255.
You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.
All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. If you withdraw less than the Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, you are not entitled to carry over the unused Protected Annual Income amount to another Benefit Year.
Withdrawals will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) for IRAs or the life expectancy payments for nonqualified contracts. In addition, in order for this exception to apply, the following must occur:
1.
Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD or life expectancy payments;
2.
The calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;
3.
No withdrawals other than RMDs or life expectancy payments are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph).
If your RMD or life expectancy withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn. If your RMD or life expectancy payment exceeds the Protected Annual Income amount, the excess will not be considered an Excess Withdrawal. However, if a withdrawal other than an RMD or life expectancy payment is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to RMDs and life expectancy payments, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.
The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount impact the Protected Amount and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000 on the rider’s effective date: 
Contract Value on the rider’s effective date
$200,000
Protected Amount on the rider’s effective date
$200,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider’s effective
date
$10,000
Contract Value six months after rider’s effective date
$212,000
Protected Amount six months after rider’s effective date
$200,000
Withdrawal six months after rider’s effective date
$10,000
Contract Value after withdrawal ($212,000 - $10,000)
$202,000
Protected Amount after withdrawal ($200,000 - $10,000)
$190,000
Contract Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary
$205,000
Protected Amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary
$190,000
Protected Annual Income amount on the first Benefit Year
anniversary
$10,000
Purchase Payments added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate, multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual Income amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000 Protected Amount), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $3,000 ($2,500 + $10,000 x 1.05). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract.
Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:
C-20
1.
the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal (excludes RMDs and life expectancy payments as outlined above); or
2.
withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.
Advisory Fee Withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet, or that exceed the Advisory Fee Withdrawal percentage and the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals.
When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:
1.
the Protected Amount is reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Amount could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and
2.
the Protected Annual Income is reduced by the same proportion the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.
Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your financial professional or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have any questions about Excess Withdrawals.
The following example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Amount, the Protected Annual Income amount, and the Contract Value. The example assumes that the Contractowner makes a $12,000 withdrawal, which causes an $11,225 reduction in the Protected Amount.
Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Amount = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)
After a $12,000 withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $7,750 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value and Protected Amount are reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250:
Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Amount = $80,750 ($85,000 - $4,250)
The Contract Value is also reduced by the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Amount is reduced by 13.90%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the Contract Value of $55,750 ($7,750 ÷ $55,750).
Contract Value = $48,000 ($55,750 - $7,750) a 13.90% reduction
Protected Amount = $73,185 ($85,000 x 13.90% = $11,225; $85,000 - $11,225= $73,185)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,660 ($4,250 x 13.90%= $591; $4,250 - $591 = $3,659)
In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Amount and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Amount is reduced to zero, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.
Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.
Final Payment Year. The year that the final payment is made is determined from the chart below based on the owner’s age on the latest date to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy. This date is one year after the date of death for nonqualified contracts, and December 31st of the calendar year following the date of death occurred for qualified contracts.
If the Contract and rider are still in effect on the Benefit Year anniversary occurring in the final payment year, a final payment will be made that is equal to the greater of the Protected Amount or Contract Value, and the Contract and rider will terminate. The final payment year is determined on the rider effective date and will not change. The final payment year is determined from the chart below and is based on your age. All amounts must be paid out of the Contract in this final payment year. 
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
0
82
28
55
56
28
1
81
29
54
57
27
2
80
30
53
58
27
3
79
31
52
59
26
4
78
32
51
60
25
C-21
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
Age
Final GMWB Payment Year
5
77
33
50
61
24
6
76
34
49
62
23
7
75
35
48
63
22
8
74
36
47
64
21
9
73
37
46
65
21
10
72
38
45
66
20
11
71
39
44
67
19
12
70
40
43
68
18
13
69
41
42
69
17
14
68
42
41
70
17
15
67
43
40
71
16
16
66
44
39
72
15
17
66
45
38
73
14
18
65
46
37
74
14
19
64
47
37
75
13
20
63
48
36
76
12
21
62
49
35
77
12
22
61
50
34
78
11
23
60
51
33
79
10
24
59
52
32
80
10
25
58
53
31
81
9
26
57
54
30
 
 
27
56
55
29
 
 
Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Wealth PassSM has no provision for a payout of the Protected Amount upon death of the Contractowner or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9), as applicable, as amended from time to time.
Upon the death of the Contractowner, if there is Contract Value and a Protected Amount in effect at the time of the death and there is only one Beneficiary, the Beneficiary may continue the rider to pay out the remaining Protected Amount. We cannot divide the Protected Amount among multiple Beneficiaries. No adjustment will be made to the Protected Amount, Protected Annual Income Amount, protected lifetime income fee base, or final payment year. If the Protected Annual Income amount was not determined prior to death, then the rate will be set according to the deceased Contractowner’s age on the continuation date. Continuation is not available if the Contract Value is reduced to zero prior to the death of the Contractowner.
Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Lincoln Wealth PassSM will automatically terminate:
•
on the Annuity Commencement Date;
•
upon death of the Contractowner, unless there is a Protected Amount and a single Beneficiary elects to continue the Contract and rider;
•
if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;
•
on the date the Contractowner is changed pursuant to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree;
•
upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract;
•
on the rider date anniversary occurring in the final payment year;
•
when the Protected Amount and the Protected Annual Income amount are reduced to zero; or
•
when the final payment is made.
The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Amount. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefit and charges within this rider will terminate.
C-22
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) is a rider that provides a Protected Income Base which will be used to establish the amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage. If you elect 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), you must later elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk). You will be subject to certain Investment Requirements in which your Contract Value must be allocated among specified Subaccounts. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements.
Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is an amount used to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) at a later date. The Protected Income Base is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elected 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) at the time you purchased the Contract, the Protected Income Base equals your initial Purchase Payment. If you elected the rider after you purchased the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equals the Contract Value on the effective date of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk). The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million. The maximum takes into consideration the total guaranteed amounts from all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or Secondary Life, if joint life option) are the covered lives.
Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base). For example, an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 will increase the Protected Income Base by $10,000. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.
Each withdrawal (including the portion of cumulative Advisory Fee Withdrawals over 1.25% of your Contract Value for that Contract Year) reduces the Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal.
The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Protected Income Base and the Contract Value. The Contractowner makes a withdrawal of $11,200 which causes a $12,550 reduction in the Protected Income Base.
Prior to the withdrawal:
Contract Value = $112,000
Protected Income Base = $125,500
After a withdrawal of $11,200, the Contract Value is reduced by 10% ($11,200) and the Protected Income Base is also reduced by 10%, the same proportion by which the withdrawal reduced the Contract Value ($11,200 ÷ $112,000)
Contract Value = $100,800 ($112,000 - $11,200)
Protected Income Base = $112,950 ($125,500 x 10% = $12,550; $125,500 - $12,550 = $112,950)
In a declining market, withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals, this rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to a withdrawal, both the rider and the Contract will terminate.
Account Value Step-up. The Protected Income Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:
a.
the Annuitant (single life option), or the Secondary Life (joint life option) are still living and under age 86; and
b.
the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including the protected lifetime income fee, account fee and Advisory Fee Withdrawals in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value), plus any Purchase Payments made on that date is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement (if any).
The Account Value Step-up is available even in years in which a withdrawal has occurred.
5% Enhancement. On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5% if:
a.
the Annuitant (as well as the Secondary Life if the joint life option is in effect) are under age 86; and
b.
there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year, including cumulative Advisory Fee Withdrawals in excess of 1.25% of your Contract Value for that Contract Year; and
c.
the rider is within the Enhancement Period described below.
The Enhancement Period is a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the 5% Enhancements will terminate at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the
C-23
Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs. Any new Purchase Payment made after the initial Purchase Payment will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base. However, any new Purchase Payment must be invested in the Contract for at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating the 5% Enhancement. Any new Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days after the effective date of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will be included in the Protected Income Base for purposes of calculating the 5% Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.
If you decline the Account Value Step-up during the first 10 Benefit Years, you will continue to be eligible for the 5% Enhancements through the end of the current Enhancement Period, but the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) charge could increase to the then current charge at the time of any 5% Enhancements after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. You will have the option to opt out of the enhancements after the 10th Benefit Year. In order to be eligible to receive further 5% Enhancements the Annuitant (single life option), or the Secondary Life (joint life option) must still be living and be under age 86.
Note: The 5% Enhancement is not available in any Benefit Year there is a withdrawal from Contract Value. A 5% Enhancement will occur in subsequent years only under certain conditions. If you are eligible (as defined below) for the 5% Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.
The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals):
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05).
Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 = $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000
This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the enhancement on the first Benefit year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider. It will not be eligible for the 5% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).
As explained below, the 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides a greater increase to the Protected Income Base, you will not receive the 5% Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the enhancement would not apply. The 5% Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
You will not receive the 5% Enhancement on any Benefit Year anniversary in which there is a withdrawal. The 5% Enhancement will occur on the following Benefit Year anniversary if no further withdrawals are made from the Contract and the rider is within the Enhancement Period.
The following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the 5% Enhancement affect the Protected Income Base and the potential for the charge to increase or decrease (assuming there have been no withdrawals or new Purchase Payments): 
 
Contract Value
Protected Income Base with 5% Enhancement
Protected Income Base
 
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000
$50,000
N/A
$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary
$54,000
$52,500
$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary
$53,900
$56,700
$56,700
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.
Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. Generally all Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9), as amended. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.
If the Contractowner is not also named as the Annuitant or the Secondary Life, upon the first death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider will continue. Upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life, 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will terminate.
C-24
Upon the death of the Contractowner, the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider will continue only if either Annuitant or the Secondary Life becomes the new Contractowner and payments under i4LIFE® Advantage begin within one year after the death of the Contractowner.
Termination. After the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. After this time, the rider will also terminate if the Contractowner fails to adhere to the Investment Requirements. 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will automatically terminate:
•
on the Annuity Commencement Date; or
•
if the Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral; or
•
upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life; or
•
when the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals; or
•
the last day that you can elect i4LIFE® Advantage (age 99 for nonqualified contracts); or
•
upon termination of the underlying contract.
This termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may decide to later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). The transition must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage - i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.
C-25
Appendix D — Protected Annual Income Rates for Previous Rider Elections
 
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:
Protected Annual Income Percentage by Age for Rider Elections On Or After May 20, 2013. 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Protected Annual Income
amount percentage
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Protected Annual Income
amount percentage
55 – 58
3.50%
55 – 58
3.00%
59 – 64
4.00%
59 – 64
3.50%
65+
5.00%
65 – 74
4.50%
 
 
75+
5.00%
Protected Annual Income Percentage by Age for Rider Elections Prior to May 20, 2013. 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Protected Annual Income
amount percentage
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Protected Annual Income
amount percentage
55 – 58
4.00%
55 – 64
4.00%
59+
5.00%
65+
5.00%
 
Lincoln Wealth PassSM Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:
Lincoln Wealth PassSM rider election forms signed between September 16, 2019 and May 18, 2020 
Age
PAI Rate
0 – 54
4.50%
55 – 58
5.00%
59 – 69
5.50%
70+
6.00%
D-1
Appendix E — Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages for Previous Rider Elections
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections for applications and/or rider election forms signed between January 9, 2017 and May 18, 2020 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option**
Age
GIB Percentage*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
GIB Percentage*
Under age 40
2.50%
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – 54
3.00%
55 – 58
3.50%
55 – 58
3.50%
59 – 64
4.00%
59 – 69
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 74
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
75 – 79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
80+
5.50%
*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.
 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:
 
i4LIFE® Advantage with Guaranteed Income Benefit elections or for purchasers
of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 on or after May 20, 2013. 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Percentage of Account
Value, Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Percentage of Account
Value, Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount*
Under age 40
2.50%
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – under 59½
3.00%
55 – under 59½
3.50%
59½ – 64
3.50%
59½ – 64
4.00%
65 – 69
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 74
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
75 – 79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
80+
5.50%
*
Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up or the rider's effective date (if there has not been any Account Value Step-up) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for prior purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)
on or after May 20, 2013. 
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Percentage of Account
Value or Income Base*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Percentage of Account
Value or Income Base*
Under age 40
2.50%
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
40 – 54
3.00%
55 – under 59½
3.50%
55 – under 59½
3.50%
59½ – 64
4.00%
59½ – 69
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 74
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
75 – 79
5.00%
E-1
Single Life Option
Joint Life Option
Age
Percentage of Account
Value or Income Base*
Age
(younger of you and
your spouse’s age)
Percentage of Account
Value or Income Base*
80+
5.50%
80+
5.50%
*
Purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. 
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit elections or for purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 prior to May 20, 2013. 
Single & Joint Life Option*
Single & Joint Life Option*
Age
Percentage of Account
Value, Income Base or
Guaranteed Amount**
Under age 40
2.50%
40 – 54
3.00%
55 – 58
3.50%
59 – 64
4.00%
65 – 69
4.50%
70 – 79
5.00%
80+
5.50%
 *
If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies
 **
Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may use any remaining Income Base reduced by all Guaranteed Annual Income payments since the last Automatic Annual Step-up, if any, or the rider effective date (if there has not been any Automatic Annual Step-up) if greater than the Contract Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.
E-2
The SAI includes additional information about the Contract, Lincoln Life, and the VAA, and is incorporated by reference in this prospectus. The SAI is dated the same date as this prospectus. We will provide the SAI without charge upon request. You may obtain a free copy of the SAI and submit inquiries by:
•
Mailing: The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348
•
Visiting: www.lfg.com/VAprospectus
•
Emailing: CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com
•
Calling: 1-877-534-8255
You may also obtain reports and other information about the VAA on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at the following email address: publicinfo@sec.gov. The SEC file numbers and the Contract’s contract identifier number are listed below.
 
SEC File Nos. 333-172328; 811-08517
EDGAR Contract Identifier C000100224
STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (SAI)
Dated May 1, 2024
Relating to Prospectus Dated May 1, 2024 for
Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N, Registrant
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, Depositor
The SAI provides you with additional information about Lincoln Life, the VAA, and your Contract. It is not a prospectus.
A copy of the product prospectus dated May 1, 2024, may be obtained without a charge by writing to the Home Office: Lincoln Life Customer Service, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348, by calling: 1-877-534-8255, or by emailing: CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com and requesting a copy of the Lincoln InvestmentSolutionsSM product prospectus.
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE SAI
 
 
Special Terms
The special terms used in this SAI are the ones defined in the prospectus.
General Information and History
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company), organized in 1905, is an Indiana-domiciled insurance company, engaged primarily in the direct issuance of life insurance contracts and annuities. Lincoln Life is wholly owned by Lincoln National Corporation (LNC), a publicly held insurance and financial services holding company incorporated in Indiana. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.
Our Financial Condition. Depending on when you purchased your Contract, you may be permitted to make allocations to the fixed account, which is part of our general account. See The Fixed Side of the Contract. In addition, any guarantees under the Contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as those associated with Death Benefit options and Living Benefit Riders are paid from our general account (not the VAA). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the Contract in excess of Contract Value are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue other types of insurance policies and financial products in addition to the Contract. We also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the general account. Moreover, unlike assets held in the VAA, the assets of the general account are subject to the general liabilities of the Company and, therefore, to the Company’s general creditors. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our general account to satisfy claims under the Contract would generally receive the same priority as our other Contractowner obligations.
The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Insurance Department as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed. The laws and regulations applicable to us regulate the investments we can make with assets held in our general account. In general, those laws and regulations determine the amount and type of investments which we can make with general account assets.
In addition, state insurance regulations require that insurance companies calculate and establish on their financial statements, a specified amount of reserves in order to meet the contractual obligations to pay the claims of our Contractowners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.
State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital in excess of liabilities, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on assets held in our general account, which include bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.
How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective Contractowners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on both a statutory basis and according to Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Our audited GAAP financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the VAA, are located in the SAI. Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI, are provided on the last page of this prospectus. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.LincolnFinancial.com.
You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability. Additional information about rating agencies is included in the SAI.
Lincoln Financial Group is the marketing name for Lincoln National Corporation (NYSE:LNC) and its affiliates. Through its affiliates, Lincoln Financial Group offers annuities, life, group life and disability insurance, 401(k) and 403(b) plans, and comprehensive financial planning and advisory services.
Variable Annuity Account (VAA)
On November 3, 1997, the VAA was established as an insurance company separate account under Indiana law. It is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the provisions of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (1940 Act). The VAA is a segregated investment account. Income, gains and losses credited to, or charged against, the VAA reflect the VAA’s own investment experience
B-2
and not the investment experience of Lincoln Life’s other assets. The assets of the VAA may not be used to pay any liabilities of Lincoln Life other than those arising from the contracts supported by the VAA. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.
The VAA is used to support other annuity contracts offered by us in addition to the contracts described in this prospectus. The other annuity contracts supported by the VAA generally invest in the same funds as the contracts described in this prospectus. These other annuity contracts may have different charges that could affect the performance of their Subaccounts, and they offer different benefits.
Investment Results
At times, the VAA may compare its investment results to various unmanaged indices or other variable annuities in reports to shareholders, sales literature and advertisements. The results will be calculated on a total return basis for various periods, with or without surrender charges. Results calculated without surrender charges will be higher. Total returns include the reinvestment of all distributions, which are reflected in changes in unit value. The money market Subaccount's yield is based upon investment performance over a 7-day period, which is then annualized.
There can be no assurance that a money market fund will be able to maintain a stable net asset value of $1.00 per share. During periods of low interest rates, the yield of a money market fund may become extremely low and possibly negative. In addition, if the yield of a Subaccount investing in a money market fund becomes negative, due in part to contract fees and expenses, your Contract Value may decline. An investment in a money market fund is not insured or guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other government agency. The sponsor of a money market fund has no legal obligation to provide financial support to the fund, and you should not expect that the sponsor will provide financial support to the fund at any time. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund suspends payments of redemption proceeds, we will delay payment of any transfer, withdrawal, or benefit from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund until the fund resumes payment. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund institutes a liquidity fee, we may assess the fee against your Contract Value if a payment is made to you from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund.
The money market yield figure and annual performance of the Subaccounts are based on past performance and do not indicate or represent future performance.
Capital Markets
In any particular year, our capital may increase or decrease depending on a variety of factors — the amount of our statutory income or losses (which is sensitive to equity market and credit market conditions), the amount of additional capital we must hold to support business growth, changes in reserving requirements, our inability to secure capital market solutions to provide reserve relief, such as issuing letters of credit to support captive reinsurance structures, changes in equity market levels, the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio and changes in interest rates.
Advertising & Ratings
We may include in certain advertisements, endorsements in the form of a list of organizations, individuals or other parties which recommend Lincoln Life or the policies. Furthermore, we may occasionally include in advertisements comparisons of currently taxable and tax deferred investment programs, based on selected tax brackets, or discussions of alternative investment vehicles and general economic conditions.
Our financial strength is ranked and rated by nationally recognized independent rating agencies. The ratings do not imply approval of the product and do not refer to the performance of the product, or any separate account, including the underlying investment options. Ratings are not recommendations to buy our products. Each of the rating agencies reviews its ratings periodically. Accordingly, all ratings are subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by the rating agencies, and therefore, no assurance can be given that these ratings will be maintained. Our insurer financial strength ratings are on outlook stable except for the ratings assigned by Fitch for all three insurance subsidiaries and the rating assigned by AM Best for First Penn Pacific Life Insurance Company, which are on outlook negative. Our financial strength ratings, which are intended to measure our ability to meet contract holder obligations, are an important factor affecting public confidence in most of our products and, as a result, our competitiveness. A downgrade of our financial strength rating could affect our competitive position in the insurance industry by making it more difficult for us to market our products as potential customers may select companies with higher financial strength ratings and by leading to increased withdrawals by current customers seeking companies with higher financial strength ratings. For more information on ratings, including outlooks, see https://www.lfg.com/public/aboutus/investorrelations/financialinformation/ratings.
About the S&P 500 Index. The S&P 500® Index is a product of S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC or its affiliates (“SPDJI”), and has been licensed for use by Lincoln Financial Investment Corporation (“LFI”) on behalf of certain LVIP Funds (the “Funds”). S&P®, S&P 500®, US 500, The 500, iBoxx®, iTraxx® and CDS® are registered trademarks of S&P Global, Inc. or its affiliates (“S&P”) and Dow Jones® is a registered trademark of Dow Jones Trademark Holdings LLC (“Dow Jones”). The trademarks have been licensed to SPDJI and have been sublicensed for use for certain purposes by LFI on behalf of the Funds. It is not possible to invest directly in an index. The Funds is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by SPDJI, Dow Jones, S&P, any of their respective affiliates (collectively, “S&P Dow
B-3
Jones Indices”). S&P Dow Jones Indices does not make any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Funds or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Funds particularly or the ability of the S&P 500® Index to track general market performance. S&P Dow Jones Indices’ only relationship to the Funds with respect to the Index is the licensing of the Index and certain trademarks, service marks and/or trade names of S&P Dow Jones Indices and/or its licensors. The S&P 500® Index is determined, composed and calculated by S&P Dow Jones Indices without regard to LFI or the Funds. S&P Dow Jones Indices have no obligation to take the needs of LFI or the owners of the Funds into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the S&P 500® Index. S&P Dow Jones Indices have no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Funds. There is no assurance that investment products based on the S&P 500® Index will accurately track index performance or provide positive investment returns. S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC is not an investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, commodity pool operator, broker dealer, fiduciary, promoter (as defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended), “expert” as enumerated within 15 U.S.C. § 77k(a) or tax advisor. Inclusion of a security, commodity, crypto currency or other asset within an index is not a recommendation by S&P Dow Jones Indices to buy, sell, or hold such security, commodity, crypto currency or other asset nor is it considered to be investment advice.
NEITHER S&P DOW JONES INDICES NOR A THIRD PARTY LICENSOR GUARANTEES THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY, TIMELINESS AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE S&P 500® INDEX OR ANY DATA RELATED THERETO OR ANY COMMUNICATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ORAL OR WRITTEN COMMUNICATION (INCLUDING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS) WITH RESPECT THERETO. S&P DOW JONES INDICES SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY DAMAGES OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR DELAYS THEREIN. S&P DOW JONES INDICES MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE FUNDS, OWNERS OF THE FUNDS, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE INDEX OR WITH RESPECT TO ANY DATA RELATED THERETO. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT WHATSOEVER SHALL S&P DOW JONES INDICES BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, TRADING LOSSES, LOST TIME OR GOODWILL, EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. S&P DOW JONES INDICES HAS NOT REVIEWED, PREPARED AND/OR CERTIFIED ANY PORTION OF, NOR DOES S&P DOW JONES INDICES HAVE ANY CONTROL OVER, THE FUNDS REGISTRATION STATEMENT, PROSPECTUS OR OTHER OFFERING MATERIALS. THERE ARE NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES OF ANY AGREEMENTS OR ARRANGEMENTS BETWEEN S&P DOW JONES INDICES AND LFI ON BEHALF OF THE FUNDS, OTHER THAN THE LICENSORS OF S&P DOW JONES INDICES.
Non-Principal Risks of Investing In The Contract
Opportunity Cost. Principal amounts committed to an annuity contract are only available to choose from investment options available on the Contract, potentially causing you an opportunity cost.
Dying early. If you die earlier than expected, your designated beneficiary may not receive the full benefit of the future payments.
Divorce. If you get divorced, you could forfeit some or all of the value of your annuity to your former spouse.
Affiliated Funds. We may have incentive to select affiliated funds because we receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than a non-affiliated fund.
Fund of Funds. In some fund of funds (or master-feeder) arrangements, you may pay fees and expenses at both fund levels, which can reduce your investment return.
Services
Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, One Commerce Square, 2005 Market Street, Suite 700, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 19103, has audited a) the financial statements of each of the subaccounts listed in the appendix to the opinion that comprise Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N, as of December 31, 2023, the related statements of operations and the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods indicated in the appendix to the opinion; and b) the consolidated financial statements of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2023 and 2022 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2023 as set forth in their reports, which are included in this SAI and Registration Statement. The aforementioned financial statements are included herein in reliance on Ernst & Young LLP's reports, given on their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.
Keeper of Records
All accounts, books, records and other documents which are required to be maintained for the VAA are maintained by us or by third parties responsible to Lincoln Life. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, c/o WeWork, 1100
B-4
Main Street, Suite 400, Kansas City, MO 64105, to provide accounting services to the VAA. No separate charge against the assets of the VAA is made by us for this service.
Purchase of Securities Being Offered
The variable annuity contracts are offered to the public through investment professionals who offer investment advice for a fee. There are no special purchase plans for any class of prospective buyers. However, under certain limited circumstances described in the prospectus under the section of Charges and Other Deductions, any applicable account fee may be reduced or waived.
Both before and after the annuity commencement date, there are exchange privileges between subaccounts, and from the VAA to the general account (if available) subject to restrictions set out in the prospectus. See The Contracts, in the prospectus. No exchanges are permitted between the VAA and other separate accounts.
The offering of the contracts is continuous.
Principal Underwriter
Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lincoln National Corporation and an affiliate of Lincoln Life. LFD serves as the principal underwriter (the “Principal Underwriter”) for the contracts, as described in the prospectus. The Principal Underwriter currently offers, and expects to continue offering, the contracts to the public on a continuous basis, but reserves the right to discontinue offering the contracts at any time. The Principal Underwriter offers the contracts through sales representatives, who are registered with either Lincoln Financial Advisors Corporation (“LFA”) or Lincoln Financial Securities Corporation (“LFS”) (collectively, “LFN”), both of which are affiliates of LFD. The Principal Underwriter also may enter into selling agreements with other broker-dealers (“Selling Firms”) for the sale of the contracts. Sales representatives who are registered with Selling Firms are appointed as our insurance agents. LFD, in its capacity as Principal Underwriter, paid to LFN and Selling Firms, sales compensation totaling $506,762,034, $428,870,241 and $403,677,807 in 2021, 2022 and 2023, respectively, in connection with all of the contracts offered under the VAA. The Principal Underwriter retained no underwriting commissions for the sale of the contracts. LFD maintains its principal place of business at 130 North Radnor Chester Road, Radnor, Pennsylvania 19087.
Contract Information
Interest Adjustment Example
Note: This example is intended to show how the Interest Adjustment calculation impacts the surrender value of a representative contract. The annual account fee, adjustment factor, and guaranteed minimum interest rate values shown here are generally different from those that apply to specific contracts, particularly those contracts that deduct an initial sales load or pay a bonus on deposits. Calculations of the Interest Adjustment in your Contract, if applicable, will be based on the factors applicable to your Contract. The Interest Adjustment may be referred to as a market value adjustment in your Contract.
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR MALE 35 ISSUE
CASH SURRENDER VALUES 
Single Premium
$50,000
Premium taxes
None
Withdrawals
None
Guaranteed Period
5 years
Guaranteed Interest Rate
3.50%
Annuity Date
Age 70
Index Rate A
3.50%
Index Rate B
4.00% End of Contract Year 1
3.50% End of Contract Year 2
3.00% End of Contract Year 3
2.00% End of Contract Year 4
Percentage adjustment to B
0.50%
 
Interest Adjustment Formula
(1 + Index A)n
-1
n = Remaining Guaranteed Period
(1 + Index B + % Adjustment)n
B-5
SURRENDER VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
(1)
Annuity
Value
(2)
1 + Interest
Adjustment Formula
(3)
Adjusted
Annuity
Value
(4)
Minimum
Value
(5)
Greater of
(3) & (4)
(6)
Surrender
Value
1
$51,710
0.962268
$49,759
$50,710
$50,710
$46,460
2
$53,480
0.985646
$52,712
$51,431
$52,712
$48,462
3
$55,312
1.000000
$55,312
$52,162
$55,312
$51,312
4
$57,208
1.009756
$57,766
$52,905
$57,766
$54,266
5
$59,170
N/A
$59,170
$53,658
$59,170
$56,170
ANNUITY VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
BOY*
Annuity
Value
 
Guaranteed
Interest Rate
 
Annual
Account
Fee
 
EOY**
Annuity
Value
1
$50,000
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$51,710
2
$51,710
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$53,480
3
$53,480
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$55,312
4
$55,312
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$57,208
5
$57,208
x
1.035
-
$40
=
$59,170
1 + INTEREST ADJUSTMENT FORMULA CALCULATION 
Contract Year
Index A
Index B
Adj Index B
N
Result
1
3.50
%
4.00
%
4.50
%
4
0.962268
2
3.50
%
3.50
%
4.00
%
3
0.985646
3
3.50
%
3.00
%
3.50
%
2
1.000000
4
3.50
%
2.00
%
2.50
%
1
1.009756
5
3.50
%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MINIMUM VALUE CALCULATION 
Contract Year
 
 
Minimum
Guaranteed
Interest Rate
 
Annual
Account
Fee
 
Minimum
Value
1
$50,000
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$50,710
2
$50,710
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$51,431
3
$51,431
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$52,162
4
$52,162
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$52,905
5
$52,905
x
1.015
-
$40
=
$53,658
 *
BOY = beginning of year
 **
EOY = end of year
Additional Services
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA)—You may systematically transfer, on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available, amounts from certain Subaccounts, or the fixed side (if available) of the contract into the Subaccounts or in accordance with other terms we make available. You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by completing an election form available from us. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged is $1,500 over any time period between six and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the Annuity Commencement Date;
•
the value of the amount being DCA'd is depleted; or
•
you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.
We reserve the right to discontinue or restrict access to this program at any time.
B-6
A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program. However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.
Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS)—AWS provides an automatic, periodic withdrawal of Contract Value to you. AWS may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. You may elect to participate in AWS at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by sending a written request to us. The minimum Contract Value required to establish AWS is $10,000. You may cancel or make changes to your AWS program at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, certain changes may be made by telephone. Notwithstanding the requirements of the program, any withdrawal must be permitted under Section 401(a)(9) of the IRC for qualified plans or permitted under Section 72 of the IRC for nonqualified contracts.
Portfolio Rebalancing — Portfolio rebalancing is an option, which, if elected by the Contractowner, restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of the Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage), allocated to each variable Subaccount. This pre-determined level will be the allocation initially selected when the Contract was purchased, unless subsequently changed. The portfolio rebalancing allocation may be changed at any time by submitting a written request to us. If portfolio rebalancing is elected, all Purchase Payments allocated to the variable Subaccounts must be subject to portfolio rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. The Contractowner may terminate the portfolio rebalancing program or re-enroll at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, the Contractowner may make these elections by phone. The portfolio rebalancing program is not available following the Annuity Commencement Date.
Please note that all of the services discussed in this section will stop once we become aware of a pending death claim.
SecureLine® Account – SecureLine® is an interest bearing draft account established from the proceeds payable on a Contract administered by us that helps you manage your surrender or death benefit proceeds. You are the owner of the account, and are the only one authorized to transfer proceeds from the account. You may choose to leave the proceeds in this account, or you may use the checkbook we previously provided and write checks against the account until the funds are depleted. The SecureLine® account is part of our general account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our general account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the SecureLine® account.
Interest credited in the SecureLine® account is taxable as ordinary income in the year such interest is credited, and is not tax deferred. We recommend that you consult your tax advisor to determine the tax consequences associated with the payment of interest on amounts in the SecureLine® account. The balance in your SecureLine® account began earning interest the day your account was opened and will continue to earn interest until all funds are withdrawn. Interest is compounded daily and credited to your account on the last day of each month. The interest rate will be updated monthly and we may increase or decrease the rate at our discretion. The interest rate credited to your SecureLine® account may be more or less than the rate earned on funds held in our general account. The interest rate offered with a SecureLine® account is not necessarily that credited to the fixed account. There are no monthly fees. You may be charged a fee if you stop a payment or if you present a check for payment without sufficient funds.
Other Information
Due to differences in redemption rates, tax treatment or other considerations, the interests of policyholders under the variable life accounts could conflict with those of Contractowners under the VAA. In those cases, where assets from variable life and variable annuity separate accounts are invested in the same fund(s) (i.e., where mixed funding occurs), the Boards of Directors of the fund involved will monitor for any material conflicts and determine what action, if any, should be taken. If it becomes necessary for any separate account to replace shares of any fund with another investment, that fund may have to liquidate securities on a disadvantageous basis. Refer to the prospectus for each fund for more information about mixed funding.
Determination of Accumulation and Annuity Unit Value
A description of the days on which Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued is given in the prospectus. The New York Stock Exchange's (NYSE) most recent announcement (which is subject to change) states that it will be closed on weekends and on these holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day, President's Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Juneteenth, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. If any of these holidays occurs on a weekend day, the Exchange may also be closed on the business day occurring just before or just after the holiday. It may also be closed on other days.
Since the portfolios of some of the funds and series will consist of securities primarily listed on foreign exchanges or otherwise traded outside the United States, those securities may be traded (and the net asset value of those funds and series and of the variable account could therefore be significantly affected) on days when the investor has no access to those funds and series.
B-7
Annuity Payments
Variable Annuity Payouts
Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined on the basis of:
•
the dollar value of the Contract on the Annuity Commencement Date less any applicable premium tax;
•
the annuity tables contained in the Contract;
•
the type of annuity option selected; and
•
the investment results of the fund(s) selected.
In order to determine the amount of variable Annuity Payouts, we make the following calculation:
•
first, we determine the dollar amount of the first payout;
•
second, we credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units based on the amount of the first payout; and
•
third, we calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.
These steps are explained below.
The dollar amount of the first periodic variable Annuity Payout is determined by applying the total value of the Accumulation Units credited under the Contract valued as of the Annuity Commencement Date (less any premium taxes) to the annuity tables contained in the Contract. The first variable Annuity Payout will be paid 14 days after the Annuity Commencement Date. This day of the month will become the day on which all future Annuity Payouts will be paid. Amounts shown in the tables are based on the 1983 Table “a” Individual Annuity Mortality Tables, modified, with an assumed investment return at the rate of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per annum, depending on the terms of your Contract. The first Annuity Payout is determined by multiplying the benefit per $1,000 of value shown in the contract tables by the number of thousands of dollars of value accumulated under the Contract. These annuity tables vary according to the form of annuity selected and the age of the Annuitant at the Annuity Commencement Date. The assumed interest rate is the measuring point for subsequent Annuity Payouts. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed interest rate, the payout will increase at a rate equal to the amount of such excess.
Conversely, if the actual rate is less than the assumed interest rate, Annuity Payouts will decrease. If the assumed rate of interest were to be increased, Annuity Payouts would start at a higher level but would decrease more rapidly or increase more slowly.
We may use sex-distinct annuity tables in contracts that are not associated with employer sponsored plans and where not prohibited by law.
At an Annuity Commencement Date, the Contract is credited with Annuity Units for each Subaccount on which variable Annuity Payouts are based. The number of Annuity Units to be credited is determined by dividing the amount of the first periodic payout by the value of an Annuity Unit in each Subaccount selected. Although the number of Annuity Units is fixed by this process, the value of such units will vary with the value of the underlying fund. The amount of the second and subsequent periodic payouts is determined by multiplying the Contractowner’s fixed number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount by the appropriate Annuity Unit value for the Valuation Date ending 14 days prior to the date that payout is due.
The value of each Subaccount’s Annuity Unit will be set initially at $1.00. The Annuity Unit value for each Subaccount at the end of any Valuation Date is determined by multiplying the Subaccount Annuity Unit value for the immediately preceding Valuation Date by the product of:
•
The net investment factor of the Subaccount for the Valuation Period for which the Annuity Unit value is being determined, and
•
A factor to neutralize the assumed investment return in the annuity table.
The value of the Annuity Units is determined as of a Valuation Date 14 days prior to the payment date in order to permit calculation of amounts of Annuity Payouts and mailing of checks in advance of their due dates. Such checks will normally be issued and mailed at least three days before the due date.
Financial Statements
The December 31, 2023 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2023 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are incorporated into this SAI by reference to the VAA’s most recent Form N-VPFS (“Form N-VPFS”) filed with the SEC.
B-8
Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N
PART C - OTHER INFORMATION
Item 27. Exhibits
(b) Not applicable
(h) Fund Participation Agreements and Amendments between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:
B-2
(j) Rule 22c-2 Agreements between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:
B-3
(m) Not applicable
(n) Not applicable
(o) Not applicable
Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Depositor
The following list contains the officers and directors of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company who are engaged directly or indirectly in activities relating to Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N as well as the contracts. The list also shows The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company's executive officers.  
Name
Positions and Offices with Depositor
Craig T. Beazer*
Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti*
Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer and Director
Adam M. Cohen*
Senior Vice President, Chief Accounting Officer and Treasurer
Ellen G. Cooper*
President and Director
Stephen B. Harris*
Senior Vice President and Chief Ethics and Compliance Officer
Christopher M. Neczypor*
Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Director
Nancy A. Smith*
Senior Vice President and Secretary
Joseph D. Spada**
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer for Separate Accounts
Eric B. Wilmer***
Assistant Vice President and Director
*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087
**Principal business address is 350 Church Street, Hartford, CT 06103
***Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802
Item 29. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with the Depositor or Registrant
Item 30. Indemnification
a) Brief description of indemnification provisions.
B-4
In general, Article VII of the By-Laws of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company) provides that Lincoln Life will indemnify certain persons against expenses, judgments and certain other specified costs incurred by any such person if he/she is made a party or is threatened to be made a party to a suit or proceeding because he/she was a director, officer, or employee of Lincoln Life, as long as he/she acted in good faith and in a manner he/she reasonably believed to be in the best interests of, or act opposed to the best interests of, Lincoln Life. Certain additional conditions apply to indemnification in criminal proceedings.
In particular, separate conditions govern indemnification of directors, officers, and employees of Lincoln Life in connection with suits by, or in the right of, Lincoln Life.
Please refer to Article VII of the By-Laws of Lincoln Life (Exhibit no. f(b) hereto) for the full text of the indemnification provisions. Indemnification is permitted by, and is subject to the requirements of, Indiana law.
b) Undertaking pursuant to Rule 484 of Regulation C under the Securities Act of 1933:
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the provisions described in Item 28(a) above or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any such action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
Item 31. Principal Underwriter
(a) Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) currently serves as Principal Underwriter for: Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account C; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account D; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account F; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account G; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account J; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account K; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N; Lincoln New York Account N for Variable Annuities; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account Q; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account R; LLANY Separate Account R for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account S; LLANY Separate Account S for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account T; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account W; and Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y and Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-H; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-I; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-A; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-C; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JL-A; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JA-B; Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust; Lincoln Advisors Trust.
(b) Officers and Directors of Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc.: 
Name
Positions and Offices with Underwriter
Adam M. Cohen*
Senior Vice President and Treasurer
Jason M. Gibson**
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer
Claire H. Hanna*
Secretary
John C. Kennedy*
President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
Jared M. Nepa*
Senior Vice President and Director
Thomas P. O'Neill*
Senior Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Head of Financial
Institutions Group
Timothy J. Seifert Sr*
Senior Vice President and Director
*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087
**Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802
(c) N/A
B-5
Item 32. Location of Accounts and Records
This information is provided in the Registrant’s most recent report on Form N-CEN.
Item 33. Management Services
Not Applicable.
Item 34. Fee Representation
Lincoln Life represents that the fees and charges deducted under the contracts, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Lincoln Life.
B-6

 

SIGNATURES

 

(a)As required by the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, each Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of these registration statements and has caused these Post-Effective Amendments to the registration statements to be signed on its behalf, in the City of Fort Wayne, and the State of Indiana on this 10th day of April, 2024 at 3:21 pm.

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N

(Registrants)

 

By:/s/ Daniel P. Herr
  Daniel P. Herr
  Senior Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

 

Signed on its behalf, in the City of Hartford, and the State of Connecticut on this 10th day of April, 2024 at 2:32 pm.

 

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

(Depositor)

 

By:/s/ Michelle L. Grindle
  Michelle L. Grindle
  (Signature-Officer of Depositor)
  Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E (File No. 811-04882; CIK: 0000804223)

 

033-26032 (Amendment No. 78)

 

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H (File No. 811-05721; CIK: 0000847552)

 

033-27783 (Amendment No. 77)   333-63505 (Amendment No. 86)   333-181615 (Amendment No. 43)
333-18419 (Amendment No. 80)   333-135219 (Amendment No. 59)   333-212681 (Amendment No. 23)
333-35780 (Amendment No. 60)   333-170695 (Amendment No. 53)   333-233762 (Amendment No. 10)
333-35784 (Amendment No. 75)   333-175888 (Amendment No. 29)   333-233764 (Amendment No. 16)
333-61592 (Amendment No. 77)        

 

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N (File No. 811-08517; CIK: 0001048606)

 

333-36316 (Amendment No. 98)   333-172328 (Amendment No. 47)   333-214143 (Amendment No. 28)
333-36304 (Amendment No. 86)   333-174367 (Amendment No. 35)   333-214144 (Amendment No. 17)
333-40937 (Amendment No. 92)   333-181612 (Amendment No. 41)   333-214235 (Amendment No. 16)
333-61554 (Amendment No. 92)   333-186894 (Amendment No. 44)   333-236907 (Amendment No. 12)
333-135039 (Amendment No. 59)   333-193272 (Amendment No. 31)   333-239288 (Amendment No. 9)
333-138190 (Amendment No. 70)   333-193273 (Amendment No. 23)   333-252473 (Amendment No. 17)
333-149434 (Amendment No. 42)   333-193274 (Amendment No. 20)   333-252653 (Amendment No. 12)
333-170529 (Amendment No. 44)   333-212680 (Amendment No. 26)   333-252654 (Amendment No. 12)
333-170897 (Amendment No. 48)   333-212682 (Amendment No. 19)    

 

 

 

 

(b)As required by the Securities Act of 1933, these Amendments to the registration statements have been signed by the following persons in their capacities indicated on April 10, 2024 at 3:21 pm.

 

Signature Title
   
*/s/ Ellen G. Cooper President and Director
Ellen G. Cooper (Principal Executive Officer)
   
*/s/ Christopher M. Neczypor Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, and Director
Christopher M. Neczypor  
   
*/s/ Craig T. Beazer Executive Vice President and Director
Craig T. Beazer  
   
*/s/ Jayson R. Bronchetti Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer, and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti  
   
*/s/ Adam M. Cohen Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer
Adam M. Cohen (Principal Accounting Officer)
   
*/s/ Eric B. Wilmer Assistant Vice President and Director
Eric B. Wilmer  

 

* By/s/ Daniel P. Herr, Pursuant to a Power of Attorney 
 Daniel P. Herr 

 

 

 

ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

EXHIBIT 99.B(L)(1)

EXHIBIT 99.B(L)(2)